JP2021142095A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine allowing a game to be executed excellently.SOLUTION: When rotations of respective reels are started, acceleration control of the respective reels is performed. The reels whose acceleration control is over keep rotating at fixed speed. When a stop button is operated, stop control of the reels corresponding to the stop button is performed. When rotations of all the reels are stopped and a combination of symbols corresponding to winning combinations stops on a main line, a privilege corresponding to winning occurred is imparted to a player as a winning combination occurs. In this case, when a reel index sensor corresponding to the reel is turned on after acceleration control of one reel is completed, operation of the stop button with respect to the one reel is made valid even when the reel index sensor corresponding to the other reels is not on.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration in which an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit are provided as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2019-202037

Here, it is necessary to make the game suitable for the gaming machine as in the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preferably performing a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 comprises a picture display means having a plurality of variable display areas for variable display of a picture.
A start operation means operated to start a variable display of a pattern in the plurality of variable display areas, and a start operation means.
A plurality of stop operation means provided corresponding to the plurality of the variable display areas and operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the corresponding variable display areas.
The variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display areas is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variation display of the pattern in the corresponding variation display area is started based on the operation of the stop operation means. And the pattern display control means that controls the pattern display means so that
With
The pattern display control means
Acceleration control means for accelerating the variation display of the pattern in these variation display areas when the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display areas is started.
When it is specified that the variation display position of the pattern in the predetermined variation display area where the acceleration by the acceleration control means is completed has become the predetermined reference position, the variation display of the pattern in the other variation display area is the predetermined reference position. A stop enablement setting means that enables execution of stop control by the operation of the stop operation means for the change display of the pattern in the predetermined change display area, even if it is not specified that the result is
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to make the game suitable.

It is a front view of the slot machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a front view of a housing. It is an assembly perspective view of the left reel. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window part, and a combination line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. (A) is a front view of a common display area, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the content of information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the combined display unit. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the notification content of the stop order in an image display device, and the display content of a stop order in a dual-purpose display unit. It is an electric block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the start waiting process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of a combination executed by the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the combination lottery table in a non-bonus state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the combination lottery table in the RT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode to be established. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the winning data executed by the main MPU. (A) It is a connection diagram which shows the drive system of a stepping motor, and (b) is the figure which shows the drive characteristic of a stepping motor. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of phase excitation. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the acceleration table, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stop table. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each area of the main side RAM used for executing the rotation control of each reel. It is a flowchart which shows the stepping motor control process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stop control processing which is executed in the main MPU. (A) to (j) is a time chart showing how the rotation control of each reel is executed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is a flowchart which shows the correspondence process at the end of a game executed by the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the game state and the game section existing in a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonus which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for RT executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stop order notification control processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stop mode of the reel when the reverse push notification is executed and the reel stop operation is performed according to the reverse push notification (a) to (c). It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the end of a game executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the control process of the bet display part executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo bet correspondence processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bet notification control processing which is executed in the production side MPU. (A) to (h) are time charts showing how bet notification is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control process of the game section executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control process of the game section executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous lottery process at the start of a game executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT state at the start of a game executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT which is executed in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the production mode in the addition period. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image display for deciding which of the 1st to 3rd effect modes (a) to (d) effect mode is set. It is a flowchart which shows the selection process of the production mode executed by the production side MPU. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows how the type of the effect mode to be executed is determined in the addition period in the selection period of the effect mode. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for the addition period executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process during the addition period executed by the effect side MPU. (A) to (g) is a time chart showing how the setting mode of the intermediate freeze period differs depending on whether or not the reel stop order is notified. It is a flowchart which shows the ending correspondence processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stop order notification process at the time of AT executed by the main MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the reverse push notification is executed when the index value IV = 10 is won, and (b) forward push notification is executed when the index value IV = 10 is won. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state. It is a flowchart which shows the production control processing in AT which is executed by the production side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the display content of the ending confirmation effect executed by an image display device, and (b) an example of the display content of the ending effect executed by an image display device is explained. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (c) an example of the display content of the transition waiting effect executed by the image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the end control processing which is executed in the production side MPU. (A) to (h) are time charts showing the operation contents of the slot machine when the ending condition is satisfied in the AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the non-migration correspondence processing which is executed in the main MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the selection mode of the setting suggestion lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the non-transition continuous counter and the setting value set as the present use target, and (b) each setting suggestion lottery. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of a table. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the effect corresponding to a small expectation command is executed by an image display device, and (b) the effect corresponding to a medium setting command is executed by an image display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state, and is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (c) the state which the effect corresponding to a high setting command is executed in an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the production control processing during non-AT executed by the production side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the selection mode of the transition suggestion lottery table corresponding to the combination of the game number range of the number of unlocked games, and the type of a transition mode, and (b) the content of each transition suggestion lottery table is explained. It is explanatory drawing for this. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the 1st transition image displayed by an image display device, and (b) it is explanatory drawing for explaining the 2nd transition image displayed by an image display device. (C) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 3rd transition image displayed by the image display apparatus. (A) to (f) is a time chart showing the execution contents of the effect from the first section to the occurrence of the transition to the second section. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process which is executed in the main MPU. (A) to (h) is a time chart showing how the output level of the AT signal is switched. It is a flowchart which shows the stepping motor control process which is executed in the main MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stepping motor control process which is executed in the main MPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the end control process which is executed in the production side MPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production control processing during non-AT executed by the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for addition period executed by the main MPU in 5th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to the slot machine 10, which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape that is open forward as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with the shaft portion 15 provided on the left side of the housing 11 as a rotating shaft. The front door 12 is locked in an unopenable state by a locking device 13 provided on the back surface thereof, and this locked state is released by an unlocking operation with a predetermined key on the key cylinder 14.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the center of the front door 12. The game panel 20 is formed so that three vertically long display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R are arranged side by side. The display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape, respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. There is. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

Each of these reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor 33, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving each stepping motor 33. It has become. Since each of these reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has the same configuration, the left reel 32L will be described here as an example based on FIG. FIG. 4 is an assembly perspective view of the left reel 32L.

The left reel 32L includes a cylindrical skeleton member 34 that forms a cylindrical basket, and a belt-shaped belt (not shown in FIG. 4) that is wound endlessly on the outer peripheral surface thereof. Then, it is attached to the cylindrical skeleton member 34 via a pair of sealing portions formed along both sides of the long side of the belt so as to maintain the wound state. A large number of symbols as identification information are printed on the outer peripheral surface of the belt at equal intervals. The central portion of the cylindrical skeleton member 34 is attached to the drive shaft of the stepping motor 33. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the stepping motor 33 rotates, the cylindrical skeleton member 34 rotates around the drive shaft, and the left reel 32L rotates.

The stepping motor 33 is screw-fixed to the side surface of the motor plate 35 arranged in an upright state in the reel unit 31. A reel index sensor 36 in which the light emitting element 36a and the light receiving element 36b are held at predetermined intervals is installed on the motor plate 35. On the other hand, a sensor cut van 37 extending in the radial direction is screwed to the cylindrical skeleton member 34. The tip portion 37a of the sensor cut van 37 is bent at a substantially right angle and is aligned so that it can pass between both elements 36a and 36b of the reel index sensor 36. Then, each time the left reel 32L makes one rotation, the reel index sensor 36 detects the passage of the tip portion 37a of the sensor cut van 37, and each time the detection is performed, a detection signal is output to the main control device 70 described later. Therefore, the main control device 70 can confirm and correct the angular position of the left reel 32L for each rotation based on this detection signal. Since the combination of the stepping motor 33, the cylindrical skeleton member 34, the motor plate 35, the reel index sensor 36, and the sensor cut van 37 is provided for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the main control device 70 is each. It can be individually confirmed that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have made one rotation.

The stepping motor 33 is set to rotate once by advancing 504 steps by giving an excitation signal of 504 pulses, for example, and the rotation position of the stepping motor 33, that is, the rotation position of the left reel 32L is controlled by the number of steps. Will be done. On each belt of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols, specifically 21 symbols, are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction) thereof. In this case, it takes 24 steps (that is, 24 pulses) to switch from one symbol to the next at a predetermined position. Then, the output of 24 steps is performed 21 times, so that 504 steps corresponding to one lap are obtained. In the main control device 70, for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which symbol can be visually recognized from the display window portion 21L by the number of steps (that is, the number of pulses) from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 36 is output. It is possible to perform control such as recognizing whether or not the state is in a state of being visible, and making an arbitrary symbol visible from the display window portion 21L.

As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20. If the start lever 41 is operated while a predetermined number or more of game media (or game values), which are either medals or virtual medals, are bet, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are arranged directly below the display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped, respectively. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 is detected by the corresponding sensor cut van 37 by the corresponding reel index sensor 36 after the acceleration of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed and the constant speed rotation is started. When it is done, the stop operation is enabled.

The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, and the game medium. It corresponds to one game (game times) until the execution of various processes such as the granting of the game and the management of the game state is completed.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 when reception is permitted by the selector 52 provided on the back surface of the front door 12, and when reception is prohibited, the medals are guided to the hopper device 53. The medal discharge port 58 provided at the lower part of the front surface of the front door 12 leads to the medal tray 59 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a prize corresponding to the addition of the game medium is established on the main lines ML1 to ML5 described later. Have. Below the medal insertion slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 that is pressed when the medal inserted in the medal insertion slot 45 is jammed in the selector 52 is provided.

On the lower left side of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R, a credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time is provided. In the slot machine 10, the number of game media (medals or virtual medals) that can be bet (that is, bet setting) at one time is "3". If the credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the current number of bets is "0" and three or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets is "3" instead of reducing the number of virtual medals by three. ". If the credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the current number of bets is "1" and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets is "3" instead of decreasing two virtual medals. ". If the credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the current number of bets is "2" and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets is "3" instead of decreasing one virtual medal. ". If the credit insertion button 47 is operated when the number of stored virtual medals is less than the difference between the current number of bets and the number of bets that can be bet, the number of bets is equal to the number of virtual medals. As the number increases, the number of virtual medals becomes 0.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. The slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and medals paid out at the time of winning as virtual medals until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement button 51 is operated while the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal ejection port 58 as actual medals. Further, when the settlement button 51 is operated while the game medium is bet, the number of medals of the bet game medium is paid out from the medal ejection port 58. Further, when the settlement button 51 is operated in a situation where the game medium is bet and the virtual medals are stored and stored, the total of the number of bet game media and the number of stored virtual medals is used. A number of medals are paid out from the medal outlet 58.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a power supply device 54 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 53 inside the housing 11. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and setting values of the slot machine 10 from "1" to "6". In order to change within the range of "", a setting key insertion hole 57 is provided in which a setting key owned by the manager of the game hall is inserted and operated.

Next, the symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 5 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Further, numbers are assigned from "0" to "20" corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers can be visually recognized by the main control device 70 described later from the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. It is a number for recognizing a symbol in such a state, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used for explanation.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), a "replay" symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L), a "watermelon" symbol (for example, the 18th on the left reel 32L), and " "Red 7" symbol (for example, 15th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (for example, 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (for example, 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol There are seven types (for example, the fifth of the left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of various symbols are different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

FIG. 6 is a front view of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Each display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be visually recognized. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

In the slot machine 10, five main lines ML1 to ML5 are set so as to connect positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be visually recognized. The first main line ML1 is a line connecting the upper design of the left reel 32L, the middle design of the middle reel 32M, and the lower design of the right reel 32R, and the second main line ML2 is the upper design of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. The upper symbol and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R are connected, and the third main line ML3 is the line connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. 4 Main line ML4 is a line connecting the lower design of the left reel 32L, the lower design of the middle reel 32M and the lower design of the right reel 32R, and the fifth main line ML5 is the lower design of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. It is a line connecting the design and the upper design of the right reel 32R. The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started with a predetermined number (specifically, "3") of game media bet, and a prize corresponding to the winning combination is placed on any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. If it is established, either the benefit of granting the game medium, the benefit of replaying, or the transition of the gaming state is granted. That is, in the slot machine 10, five main lines ML1 to ML5 are set as lines on which a prize can be established. Each main line ML1 to ML5 is set as a line extending in a straight line.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 7, the correspondence between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won will be described. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won.

The small winning combination prizes in which the game medium is given include the 1st supplementary prize, the 2nd supplementary prize, the 3rd supplementary prize, the 4th supplementary prize, the 5th supplementary prize, the 6th supplementary prize, the 7th supplementary prize, and the 8th supplementary prize. There are supplementary prizes, 9th supplementary prizes, 1st bell prizes, 2nd bell prizes, special bell prizes, 1st watermelon prizes, 2nd watermelon prizes and cherry prizes. Specifically, in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is "red 7". If it is a symbol, it will be the first supplementary prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. , It will be the second supplementary prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. , It will be the third supplementary prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. It will be the 4th supplementary prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "BAR" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. It will be the 5th supplementary prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "BAR" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. It will be the 6th supplementary prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. , 7th supplementary prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. , 8th supplementary prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. , 9th supplementary prize. In the case of any of the 1st supplementary prize to the 9th supplementary prize, the number of game media to be granted is "1".

When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. , In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol. If there is, or in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is "replay". If it is a symbol, it will be the first bell prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. It will be the second bell prize. In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol. If there is, it will be a special bell prize. In the case of any of the first bell winning, the second bell winning, and the special bell winning, the number of game media to be granted is "15".

When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. It will be the first watermelon prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. It will be the second watermelon prize. If either the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize is awarded, the number of game media to be granted is "5". When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "cherry" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. It will be a cherry prize. In the case of a cherry prize, the number of game media to be granted is "2".

There are a normal replay prize, a first chance replay prize, a second chance replay prize, and a special replay prize as prizes to which the privilege of the next game can be played without betting the game medium. Specifically, in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol. If, it is usually a replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. It will be the first chance replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. It will be the second chance replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. It will be a special replay prize.

If any of the above replay prizes are won, a replay privilege that enables the next game to be played while eliminating the need for betting on the game medium is granted. Specifically, if any of the replay prizes is won in the game in which the game medium of "3" is bet, the bet of the game medium is not required, and the game medium of "3" is bet in the next game. It becomes possible to start the game.

There are BB Nyusho and RB Nyusho as state transition prizes in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed. Specifically, in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is "red". If it is a "7" symbol, it will be a BB prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "BAR" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "BAR" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. It will be an RB prize. When the BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state, and when the RB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the RB state.

For the BB state and the RB state, the net increase expected value of the game medium in one game (“the number of game media bet in one game” is subtracted from the “expected number of game media granted in one game” as compared with the case of the non-AT state. It is a game state in which the value) becomes higher. Furthermore, the BB state and the RB state are higher than any of the game states other than the BB state and the RB state, and the net increase expected value of the game medium in one game (from "the expected number of game media to be given in one game" to "one game". It is a game state in which the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet") becomes higher. Specifically, the winning combination that enables the establishment of the first bell prize has a higher probability (for example, about 1 / 1.1) than in other gaming states, and each winning combination is won. The first bell winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The BB state and the RB state continue over a plurality of games, and end when the end condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution content of the game. The end condition is arbitrary, but in the slot machine 10, if it is in the BB state, it is set as the end condition that the total number of game media given since the start of the BB state is 350 or more. In the case of the RB state, it is set as an end condition that the total number of game media given since the start of the RB state is 150 or more.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are provided on the upper part of the front door 12, and an image display device 63 is provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is light-emitting controlled so as to perform a light-emitting effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 63. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the sound output is controlled so that the sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and the sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Sound output is controlled so that Further, the speaker 62 is controlled in sound output so that the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, or it may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the display is controlled so that the image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 is displayed and controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface. That is, the image display device 63 executes the display effect.

The game panel 20 of the front door 12 has a main bet display unit 64 and a production side bet display unit 69 that display the number of game media currently bet, and a credit display that displays the number of stored and stored virtual medals. When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified on the image display device 63 while displaying the number of game media to be granted at the time of winning a small winning combination with the unit 65, the display corresponding to the notified content is displayed. Further, a combined display unit 66 for displaying the management result of the game history and a section display unit 67 for displaying the game section corresponding to the second section are provided. There is.

The main bet display unit 64 is provided at the lower left corner of the game panel 20. In the main bed display unit 64, three light emitting units 64a, 64b, and 64c are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and a single color light emitting type LED such as red is used for each light emitting unit 64a to 64c. When the number of betting game media is "1", the light emitting unit 64a at the bottom is turned on and the remaining light emitting units 64b and 64c are turned off. When the number of betting game media is "2", the light emitting units 64a and 64b at the bottom and the center are turned on, and the light emitting units 64c at the top are turned off. When the number of betting game media is "3", all three light emitting units 64a to 64c are lit. After the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in one game, if the replay winning is not established in the game, each of the main bet display units 64 is completed when all the processing of one game is completed. All the light emitting units 64a to 64c are turned off. This off state is maintained until a new bet on the game medium is generated. When the replay winning is established, all the light emitting units 64a to 64c of the main bet display unit 64 are maintained in the lit state. The display control of the main bet display unit 64 is performed by the main control device 70, which will be described later.

The production side bet display unit 69 is arranged side by side with the display window units 21L, 21M, 21R on the left side of the display window units 21L, 21M, 21R. Five light emitting units 69a, 69b, and 69c are arranged side by side in the vertical direction of the production side bed display unit 69, and monochromatic light emitting type LEDs such as blue are used for each light emitting unit 69a to 69c. Of these light emitting parts 69a to 69c, the central light emitting part 69a is arranged laterally to the third main line ML3, and the pair of upper and lower light emitting parts 69b are lateral to the second main line ML2 and the fourth main line ML4, respectively. The light emitting portions 69c at both the upper and lower ends are arranged laterally to the first main line ML1 and the fifth main line ML5, respectively. When the number of betting game media is "1", the central light emitting unit 69a is lit in correspondence with the activation of the third main line ML3, and the remaining light emitting units 69b and 69c are turned on. It goes out. When the number of betting game media is "2", the three light emitting units 69a in the center and on the upper and lower sides thereof correspond to the activation of the second main line ML2 to the fourth main line ML4. , 69b are turned on, and the light emitting portions 69c at both the upper and lower ends are turned off. When the number of betting game media is "3", all five light emitting units 69a to 69c are lit in correspondence with the activation of all the main lines ML1 to ML5. After the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in one game, if the replay winning is not established in the game, each of the production side bet display units 69 is completed when all the processing of one game is completed. All the light emitting units 69a to 69c are turned off. This off state is maintained until a new bet on the game medium is generated. When the replay prize is established, all the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 are maintained in the lit state, except when the special replay prize is established in the first half RT state described later. The content of the display control of the production side bet display unit 69 when the special replay prize is established in the first half RT state will be described in detail later. The display control of the effect side bet display unit 69 is performed by the effect control device 90 described later.

The main bet display unit 64 is provided at the lower left corner of the game panel 20, while the effect side bet display unit 69 is provided on the left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. Further, the display range of the effect side bet display unit 69 is secured wider than the display range of the main side bet display unit 64. Therefore, the production side bet display unit 69 is more likely to be noticed by the player than the main side bet display unit 64.

The credit display unit 65 is composed of a 7-segment display. A monochromatic light emitting type LED such as green is used for each segment of the 7-segment display.

FIG. 8A is a front view of the common display area 68 provided with the combined display unit 66 and the section display unit 67. In the common display area 68, as shown in FIG. 8A, a section display unit including a combined display unit 66 in which two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction and one light emitting unit. 67 and are aggregated.

Any small role prize (1st to 9th supplementary prize, 1st bell prize, 2nd bell prize, special bell prize, 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize or cherry prize) corresponding to the grant of the game medium If it is established, the number of game media granted corresponding to the small winning combination is displayed on the combined display unit 66 at the end of the game in which the small winning combination is established. Specifically, when any of the 1st to 9th supplementary prizes is established, the 7-segment display 66a on the left side is hidden and "1" is displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right side. Notifies that the game medium of "1" has been given. If any of the 1st bell prize, the 2nd bell prize and the special bell prize is established, "1" is displayed on the left 7-segment display 66a and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. By displaying it, it is notified that the game medium of "15" has been added. Further, when either the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize is established, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. It is notified that the game medium of "5" has been added. Further, when the cherry winning is established, the 7-segment display 66a on the left side is hidden and "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right side, so that the game medium of "2" is given. Is notified.

On the other hand, even if a prize such as a replay prize, a BB prize, or an RB prize that is not given a game medium is established, the display corresponding to the prize is not displayed on the combined display unit 66, and in this case, each The 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are maintained in a hidden state. The display of the number of game media granted on the combined display unit 66 ends when the game medium is bet to start the next game of the game in which the display is performed, and each 7-segment display is displayed at the bet timing. The vessels 66a and 66b are hidden.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, the information corresponding to the notified stop order is displayed on the combined display unit 66. FIG. 8B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the combined display unit 66. As shown in FIG. 8B, in the slot machine 10, the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the middle reel as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R notified by the image display device 63. The stop order is 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the stop order is the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop. Is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is. The stop order is the left reel 32L, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R. The 2 stops are the middle reel 32M and the 3rd stop is the left reel 32L, the stop order is the 1st stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary, and the 1st stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest is There is an arbitrary stop order and a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary.

The notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 is the second bell winning data when a winning combination including the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth supplementary winning data is won in the winning combination lottery process. It can be executed when a winning combination including any of the 7th to 9th supplementary winning data is won, or when a winning combination including the 1st bell winning data and including the special bell winning data is won. Specifically, when a winning combination including the 1st bell winning data and any of the 1st to 6th supplementary winning data is won, the reel 32L is in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. , 32M, 32R are stopped, the first bell prize is established, and if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped in the stop order corresponding to the winning combination this time, the first to sixth supplementary prizes are awarded. Either can be true. If the 1st bell prize is established, the game medium of "15" is given to the player as already explained, and if any of the 1st to 6th supplementary prizes is established, "1" is given as already explained. Game medium is given to the player.

When a winning combination including the 2nd bell winning data and any of the 7th to 9th supplementary winning data is won, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are placed in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. If the reels are stopped, the second bell prize is established, and if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped in the stop order corresponding to the winning combination this time, one of the 7th to 9th supplementary prizes is established. obtain. If the 2nd bell prize is established, the game medium of "15" is given to the player as already explained, and if any of the 7th to 9th supplementary prizes is established, "1" as already explained. Game medium is given to the player.

When the winning combination including the first bell winning data and the special bell winning data is won, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order in which the left reel 32L is first stopped in each of the above stop orders. When the first bell winning is established and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order in which the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped, the first bell winning or the special bell winning is established. When the first bell prize or the special bell prize is established, the game medium of "15" is given to the player as described above.

When any of the above stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a in the combined display unit 66 is maintained in a hidden state, while the right 7-segment display 66b is maintained. Is displayed corresponding to the stop order of the notification target. This display content is as shown in FIG. 8B, and the display content of the stop order of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is set to correspond one-to-one with the notification content of the stop order in the image display device 63. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a configuration in which a plurality of types of display contents of the dual-purpose display unit 66 are set to correspond to a part or all of the notification contents of the stop order in the image display device 63. May be good.

The display content of the stop order on the combined display unit 66 is different from the display content to be displayed when the display corresponding to the addition of the game medium is performed on the combined display unit 66. As a result, it becomes easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the combined display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media provided or the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

9 (a) and 9 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order in the image display device 63 and the display content of the stop order in the combined display unit 66.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 9A, the image display device 63 has the same number of stop operations required to end the game. The unit display images GL, GM, and GR are displayed, and the image display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in each unit display image GL, GM, and GR. Specifically, the left unit display image GL corresponding to the left reel 32L, the middle unit display image GM corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and the right unit display image GR corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. Further, in FIG. 9A, the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. , The image of "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L is displayed on the left unit display image GL, and the image of "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M is displayed on the middle unit display image GM. , The image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image GR.

In the image display device 63, an image notifying the stop order itself of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed as described above, whereas in the combined display unit 66, as shown in FIG. 9B, the reels are displayed. "L" corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed. That is, in the image display device 63, the unit display images GL, GM, GR corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed, and the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R in each unit display image GL, GM, GR. While the image display corresponding to the stop order of is performed, the combined display unit 66 displays a display irrelevant to the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result, even if the combined display unit 66 displays the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the notification content of the stop order, the player can pay attention to the display content on the image display device 63.

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63. From this point as well, it is possible to reduce the degree of attention of the player to the combined display unit 66 as compared with the image display device 63. Further, the combined display unit 66 exists on the side opposite to the image display device 63 side with the display window units 21L, 21M, 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, 32R visible. As a result, the combined display unit 66 is arranged at a position separated from the image display device 63, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63 are supported. The display is started after the winning combination lottery process is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is activated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 is started before the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63. However, these displays may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time, and the display start order may be reversed. Further, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the combined display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a stop command for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. Is terminated when

The combined display unit 66 is arranged on the center side in the common display area 68, while the section display unit 67 is arranged on the corner side of the common display area 68. The section display unit 67 is a display unit for notifying that the game section is the second section of the first section and the second section. The second section is the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the player to win a prize that is advantageous to the player when the winning combination to be established is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. By notifying the stop order, the expected acquisition value of the game medium in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in one game") becomes 1 or more. It is a section in which the advantageous gaming state (specifically, the AT state) to be obtained can be started and the advantageous gaming state can be continued. On the other hand, the first section is a section in which the advantageous gaming state is not started and the advantageous gaming state does not continue.

The section display unit 67 is maintained in the off state in the first section, and is turned on by shifting to the second section. Then, when the section display unit 67 is turned on, the lighting state is maintained until the second section ends, and when the second section ends and the process shifts to the first section, the section display unit 67 turns off. ..

As described above, when the section display unit 67 is lit in the second section, the lit state is maintained until the end of the second section, and the section display unit 67 is provided in the common display area 68. When the game medium is added, the unit 66 is turned on and turned off at the start of the next game, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed on the image display device 63. It is turned on and turned off at the end of the game. Therefore, in the configuration in which the section display unit 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 so as not to be too conspicuous to the player, only the section display unit 67 is lit in the common display area 68 in the situation of the second section. It is possible to positively generate a situation in which the state is in a state, and it is possible for the manager of the game hall to easily confirm the section display unit 67.

In the second section, instead of the configuration in which the lighting state of the section display unit 67 is maintained, in the second section, the section display unit 67 may perform blinking display at a predetermined cycle. Further, other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used as the combined display unit 66 and the section display unit 67.

Next, various control devices will be described.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main control device 70 is attached to a back plate 11b that raises the back surface of the housing 11. The main control device 70 is configured such that the main control board 71 is housed in the board box 81. The MPU 72 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 71. The substrate box 81 is transparently formed so that the MPU 72 housed in the substrate box 81 can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 81. Although the substrate box 81 is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 housed in the substrate box 81 can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 so that the facing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10 in the board box 81. Therefore, by opening the front door 12 to the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 to expose the internal space of the housing 11, the facing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 can be visually recognized. The MPU 72 can be visually observed through the facing wall portion 82.

The substrate box 81 is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies in the front-rear direction, and the plurality of case bodies are used to prevent the case bodies from being separated and to leave a trace thereof when the case bodies are separated. A connecting portion 83 is provided. A plurality of connecting portions 83 are arranged side by side on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 81. As a result, even if the case body is separated by destroying the part of the joint portion 83 in a state where the separation of the case body is prevented by using a part of the joint portion 83, another joint portion is subsequently separated. By putting 83 in the bonded state, it is possible to prevent the separation of the case body again. Further, when the case body is separated, the joint portion 83 is destroyed and its trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body is illegally separated by visually checking the joint portion 83. Become. Further, in the substrate box 81, a sealing seal 84 is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies on one side different from the one side on which the connecting portions 83 are arranged side by side. When the sealing seal 84 is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, when the sealing seal 84 is peeled off when the case body is separated, it is possible to leave a trace thereof.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70. The effect control device 90 is arranged so as to be overlapped behind the image display device 63 at the front door 12. The effect control device 90 executes control of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 based on the command received from the main control device 70. The effect control device 90 has a control board housed in a board box in the same manner as the main control device 70.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main control device 70 as described above. The MPU 72 is a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 73 is executed. A RAM 74, a random number circuit 75 that sequentially updates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range based on a clock signal output from the clock circuit, and a clock circuit that outputs a square wave having a predetermined frequency are provided. In addition to that, the MPU 72 has an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 72, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 72, the reel index sensor 36 of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the reel unit 31, the start detection sensor 41a for detecting the operation of the start lever 41, and the operations of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are individually operated. Stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a to detect, insertion medal detection sensor 45a to detect the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion detection sensor 47a to detect the operation of the credit insertion button 47, operation of the settlement button 51 It detects that the setting key has been inserted into the settlement detection sensor 51a to be detected, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, the reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided in the power supply device 54, and the setting key insertion hole 57. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor are connected, and signals from each of these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

On the output side of the MPU 72, the stepping motor 33 of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the reel unit 31, the selector drive unit 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the main side bet display unit 64, and the credit display. A unit 65 (not shown in FIG. 10), a combined display unit 66, a section display unit 67, an effect control device 90, and the like are connected. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31 is performed by the MPU 72. The selector 52 detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is permitted, and then guides the medal to the hopper device 53, and when reception is prohibited, the selector 52 is guided to the insertion medal detection sensor 45a. It has a function of discharging to the medal tray 59 without detecting the medal. The selector drive unit 52a has a function for switching the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state. Specifically, the passage switching piece provided in the selector 52 is positioned for reception permission. And operate between the reception prohibition position. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the reception permitted state and the reception prohibited state by switching the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

The MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is established and medals are paid out. Further, the MPU 72 displays and controls the main bet display unit 64 so that when a bet on the game medium occurs, the number of bets is notified. Further, the MPU 72 displays and controls the credit display unit 65 so that when the virtual game medium is stored and stored, the number of the stored and stored virtual game media is displayed. Further, the MPU 72 displays and controls the combined display unit 66 so that when the game medium is given, the number of the game media to be given is displayed. Further, the MPU 72 displays and controls the section display unit 67 so that the notification of the second section is performed when the section is the second section. Further, the MPU 72 controls the display of the combined display unit 66 so that the display corresponding to the management result of the game is performed.

When the MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 90 at each timing of each game and also transmits a command to notify the effect control device 90 of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63. Executes the display control of the combined display unit 66 so that the display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the effect control device 90, whereas the direct display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed by the MPU 72. That is, for the image display device 63 that is the execution target of the relatively complicated display control, the direct display control is executed by the effect control device 90, and the combined display unit 66 that is the execution target of the relatively simple display control. Direct display control is executed in the MPU 72. As a result, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes the improvement of attention to the effect and a display that emphasizes reliability while reducing the processing load of the MPU 72.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply device 54 includes a power supply unit that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit is applied to the power supply unit from an external power source. The voltage is monitored, and when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the reference voltage, a power failure signal is output to the MPU 72. The MPU 72 executes the power failure processing by receiving the power failure signal, and makes it possible to return to the processing state before the power failure after the power is restored. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power supply unit during power failure to supply backup power to the RAM 74 as power during power failure in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power source is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, the data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in the situation where the backup power can be supplied by the power supply unit during the power failure (for example, 1 day or 2 days). Will be done.

The effect control device 90 includes an effect control board 91 for controlling various notifications and execution of various effects. The MPU 92 is mounted on the effect control board 91. The MPU 92 is a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A RAM 94 is built in, and a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like that output a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency are built in.

It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped. Further, the RAM 94 is configured such that the backup power is not supplied from the power supply unit during the power failure of the power supply device 54 when the supply of the operating power from the external power supply is cut off, but the backup power is supplied to the RAM 94. May be good.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. As described above, the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and various commands are received from the MPU 72. An upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, an image display device 63, and an effect side bet display unit 69 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. Based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, display control of the image display device 63, and light emission control of the effect side bet display unit 69. By doing so, various notifications and various effects are performed.

Although not shown, the effect control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the image display device 63. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data in the video RAM, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the image display device 63. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the image display device 63. The character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 92 determines the execution content of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 sets the VDP as a drawing list instructing the content of the image corresponding to each update timing according to the execution content of the determined effect. Output. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and creates display data in the video RAM using the read image data. Then, the VDP outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, so that the image display device 63 displays an image corresponding to the display data.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, the main ROM 73, and the main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the effect control device 90 are referred to as the effect side, respectively. It is called MPU 92, directing side ROM 93, and directing side RAM 94.

<About various processes executed by the main MPU 72>
Next, the process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main process executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, the initialization process is first executed (step S101). In the initialization process, interrupts by timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are performed for the register group in the main MPU 72, the I / O device, and the like. After that, it is determined whether or not the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S102). If the power is turned on while the setting key is turned on (step S102: YES), and if the reset button 56 is not pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: NO), After the partial clearing process is executed (step S104), the set value update process is executed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: YES), the set value update process is executed after the all clear process is executed (step S105) (step S106). In the all clear process (step S105), the entire area of the main RAM 74 is initialized, whereas in the partial clear process (step S104), the area where the BB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the RB winning data, is stored. Areas other than the stored area, the area where the information indicating the BB state is stored, and the area where the information indicating the RB state is stored are initialized.

In the setting value update process, the current setting value is read on condition that the setting key is inserted and the ON operation is performed, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. When the set value update process is executed, since either the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) is executed before that, the credit is displayed at the start of the set value update process. A display corresponding to the set value of "1" is performed on the unit 65. In the set value update process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. If the reset button 56 is operated while the set value is "6", the set value is updated to "1". When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the set value selected at that time becomes the set value set in the current set value update process, and the set value update process ends. do. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display unit 65 ends. After that, the process proceeds to normal processing (step S107). The normal processing will be described in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process after step S108 is executed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power is cut off. In the power recovery process, it is determined whether or not the set value of the slot machine 10 is normal by checking the main RAM 74 (step S108). Specifically, when the set value is any one of "1" to "6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S109). The power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 74, and when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and the predetermined power failure process is normally executed, the power failure flag is set to "1". Will be set. When the power failure flag is set to "1", it is confirmed whether or not the RAM determination value is normal (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to confirm whether or not the value is normal.

When an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S108 to S110, it means that the power failure processing at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 74 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and the data saved in the main RAM 74 is returned to the register of the main MPU 72, so that the register of the main MPU 72 The state is returned to the state before the power was cut off (step S111). Further, the power failure flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). After that, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process to the effector MPU 92 (step S113), the process returns to the address before the power is cut off (step S114).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in any of steps S108 to S110, the operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is prohibited (step S115), and all the actuators connected to the output port are cleared by clearing all the output ports of the main MPU 72 to "0". Is in the OFF state (step S116), and an error notification process for notifying the hall manager and the like of the occurrence of an error is executed (step S117). Then, it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is released by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a complete clear process (step S105).

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is started every 1.49 milliseconds, for example.

In the register save process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is confirmed whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag, and if "1" is set in the power failure flag, the process proceeds to step S203 to execute the power failure processing.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, this processing is terminated to return to the timer interrupt processing, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74. After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a determination value for determining whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 74, and subsequent RAM access is prohibited. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in case the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If "1" is not set in the power failure flag in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S205, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the main MPU 72 itself. In step S206, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving the stepping motors 33 provided on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

In step S207, the states of various sensors connected to the input port are read, and a sensor monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the read result is normal is performed. In step S208, a timer subtraction process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S209, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the outside. In step S210, a command output process for transmitting various commands to the effect side MPU 92 is performed. In step S211 a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port is performed. In step S212, control processing of the bet display unit for controlling light emission of the main side bet display unit 64 is performed. In step S213, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 is returned to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72.

In step S214, a management process for managing the game history and displaying the content corresponding to the management result on the combined display unit 66 is executed. Specifically, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section to the total number of games is calculated. Further, the ratio of the latest calculation results is displayed on the combined display unit 66 on condition that the reset button 56 is operated in a situation where the game is not being played. In this case, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section to the total number of games may be calculated for each set value. In this configuration, even if the set value is changed, the calculation may be continued without initializing the information of the above ratio performed for each set value. After that, in step S215, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (step S301). After that, the start waiting process is executed (step S302). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the start waiting process.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a (see FIG. 10) provided in the main RAM 74 is the bet upper limit number (step S401). The bet number setting counter 74a is a counter for specifying the bet number of the game to be executed by the main MPU 72. The maximum number of bets is "3". When a negative determination is made in step S401, it is determined whether or not the credit insertion button 47 has been operated in a situation where the value of the credit counter 74b provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S402). The credit counter 74b is a counter for specifying the number of virtual game media stored and stored by the main MPU 72.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S402, the bet setting process is executed (step S403). In the bet setting process, when the credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "0" and the value of the credit counter 74b is 3 or more, the value of the credit counter 74b is subtracted by 3. Instead, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is added by 3. Further, when the credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "1" and the value of the credit counter 74b is 2 or more, instead of subtracting the value of the credit counter 74b by 2. The value of the bet number setting counter 74a is added by 2. Further, when the credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "2" and the value of the credit counter 74b is 1 or more, instead of subtracting 1 from the value of the credit counter 74b. The value of the bet number setting counter 74a is added by 1. If the credit insertion button 47 is operated when the value of the credit counter 74b is smaller than the difference between the value of the bet number setting counter 74a with respect to the upper limit number of bets, the credit counter 74b is added to the value of the bet number setting counter 74a. Instead of adding the value of, the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

After that, the bet setting command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S404). The bet setting command includes information corresponding to the value of the bet number setting counter 74a after being updated by the bet setting process (step S403) this time. That is, the information on the current number of bets is included in the bet setting command. As a result, when the number of bets changes, the number of bets after the change can be specified by the effect side MPU 92.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S401, a negative judgment is made in step S402, or the process of step S404 is executed, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a indicates that a medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 45. It is determined whether or not a number of medals have been detected (step S405). When an affirmative determination is made in step S405, if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is less than the upper limit number of bets (step S406: NO), the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is added by 1 (step S407). ), The bet setting command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S408). The bet setting command includes information corresponding to the value of the bet number setting counter 74a after being updated in step S407. That is, the information on the current number of bets is included in the bet setting command. As a result, when the number of bets changes, the number of bets after the change can be specified by the effect side MPU 92. If the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is the upper limit number of bets (step S406: YES), the value of the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S409), and the credit increase command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S406: YES). Step S410). The credit increase command does not include information indicating the value of the credit counter 74b.

When the process of step S408 or step S410 is executed, it is a condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is the upper limit number of bets and the value of the credit counter 74b is the upper limit storage storage number (specifically, "50"). (Step S411: YES), the acceptance prohibition process is executed (step S412). By executing the acceptance prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal tray 59 without being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a.

When a negative determination is made in step S405, a negative determination is made in step S411, or the process of step S412 is executed, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "3" (step S413). : YES), "1" is set in the bet set flag at the time of acceptance provided in the main RAM 74 (step S414). The bet set flag at the time of acceptance is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the number of game media that can start one game is bet. After that, the credit insertion button 47 is turned off (step S415). A light emitting unit (not shown) is provided on the back side of the credit insertion button 47, and emits light in a situation where the game is not executed and the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is less than the bet upper limit number "3". The unit is lit, and the light emitting unit is turned off in a situation where the game is being executed or the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "3", which is the upper limit number of bets. By executing the process of step S415, the credit insertion button 47 changes from the lit state to the extinguished state. As a result, the player is notified that further betting of the game medium is not possible. If the value of the credit counter 74b is "0" even when the game is not being executed and the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is less than the upper limit of bets "3". The credit insertion button 47 may be turned off.

When a negative determination is made in step S413 or when the process of step S415 is executed, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 51 has been operated (step S416). When the settlement button 51 is operated (step S416: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the bet set flag at the time of replay provided in the main RAM 74 (step S417). The bet set flag at the time of replay specifies whether or not the same number of bets as the previous number of bets have already been set by the main MPU 72 when any of the replay prizes has been established in the previous game. It is a flag to do.

If a negative determination is made in step S417, the settlement process is executed (step S418). In the settlement process, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the number of medals corresponding to the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is discharged to the medal tray 59. In this case, the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared by "0" and the credit counter 74b is cleared by "0". After that, the bet set flag at the time of acceptance in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S419). Further, the settlement command is transmitted to the directing MPU 92 (step S420). The production side MPU 92 executes the process corresponding to the execution of the settlement process by receiving the settlement command.

When a negative determination is made in step S416, an affirmative determination is made in step S417, or the process of step S420 is executed, a pseudo bet handling process is executed (step S421). The pseudo-bet handling process will be described in detail later.

Returning to the description of the normal process (FIG. 13), after executing the start waiting process in step S302, "1" is set for either the bet set flag at the time of replay or the bet set flag at the time of acceptance in the main RAM 74. Is set or not (step S303). If a negative determination is made in step S303, the process returns to step S302. If an affirmative determination is made in step S303, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to step S302.

When the start lever 41 is operated (step S304: YES), the reception prohibition process is executed after all the main lines ML1 to ML5 are activated (step S305). By executing the acceptance prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal tray 59 without being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a.

After that, in step S306, the setting process at the start for making various settings when the game is started is executed, and in step S307, the winning combination lottery processing for performing the winning combination in the current game is executed. , Step S308 to Step S312 execute the freeze processing, and in step S313 perform the reel control processing for driving and controlling the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery processing of this combination. The game is executed, and in step S314, the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state and the game section corresponding to the result of the current game.

After that, the medium addition process is executed (step S315). In the medium granting process, when a small winning combination is established in this game, a process for granting a number of game media corresponding to the small winning combination to the player is executed. Specifically, when a virtual medal is given, the value corresponding to this small winning combination is added to the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74, and the value of the credit counter 74b reaches the upper limit storage storage number. Drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that a number of medals exceeding the upper limit storage storage number are paid out to the medal tray 59. Further, in the medium giving process, the display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display corresponding to the number of the game media to be given this time is performed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the combined display unit 66 is continued until a new bet is made on the game medium.

After that, the freeze processing is executed in steps S316 to S317, the external output setting processing for outputting the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall is executed in step S318, and the game is executed in step S319. Execute the setting process at the end of the game to make various settings at the end. Then, the reception permission process is executed (step S320). By executing the reception permission process, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a. However, if the replay winning game is successful and the value of the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74 is the upper limit storage storage number, the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 are inserted without executing the reception permission process. The state of being discharged to the medal tray 59 without being detected by the medal detection sensor 45a is maintained.

<Lottery process for roles>
Next, the lottery process for the winning combination executed in step S307 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, a random number used when determining whether or not a combination is correct is acquired (step S501). The slot machine 10 is configured to latch a random number at that time from the random number circuit 75 when the start lever 41 is operated. The random number circuit 75 generates random numbers of “0” to “65535”, and the main MPU 72 stores the value latched in the random number circuit 75 in the main RAM 74 when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The random number circuit 75 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, the lottery table for determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S502). In this slot machine 10, 6 levels of setting values from "1" to "6" are prepared in advance, and by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and operating the ON operation, a predetermined operation is performed. It is possible to set which set value corresponds to the winning probability to execute the winning combination lottery process. If the set value is "n + 1" rather than "n", the winning probability is more advantageous for the player. Specifically, since the winning probability of a predetermined combination is higher when the set value is "n + 1" than when the set value is "n", the set value "n + 1" is more advantageous to the player than "n". .. In addition, there are non-bonus state (including non-AT state and AT state), BB state, RB state and RT state (including non-AT state and AT state) as game states. The RT state is a game state in which the probability of winning the replay role is higher than in other game states. In addition, when the replay combination is won, the replay winning is surely established, so that the RT state is also a gaming state in which the probability that the replay winning is established is higher than other gaming states. In step S502, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value and the current gaming state is selected.

Taking the case where the set value is "3" as an example, the lottery table in the state of neither the BB state nor the RB state will be described. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a winning combination lottery table in a non-bonus state that is neither a BB state, an RB state, or an RT state, and FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a winning combination lottery table in the RT state. .. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 18 will be referred to as appropriate.

An index value IV is set in the winning combination lottery table in both the non-bonus state and the RT state, as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17. Each index value IV is associated with winning data (that is, a combination) to be won, and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding index value IV in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the random number circuit 75. In addition, the number of index values IV is the same in the non-bonus state and the RT state, and the type of winning data set in each index value IV is also the same in the non-bonus state and the RT state. It has become.

Specifically, the index value IV = 1 to 6 is set with the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth supplementary winning data. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 18, the first stop (the reel on which the stop command is first generated) is the left reel 32L, and the second stop (the second stop command is generated). When the reel) is the middle reel 32M and the third stop (the reel for which the stop command was last issued) is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is certain regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In other cases, the first supplementary prize may be established. When winning with an index value IV = 2, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to 44 The first bell prize can be surely established regardless of the operation timing of, and the fourth supplementary prize can be established in other cases. When the index value IV = 3 is won, each stop button 42 to 44 is when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The first bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of, and in other cases, the third supplementary prize can be established. When winning with an index value IV = 4, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to 44 The first bell prize can be surely established regardless of the operation timing of, and the sixth supplementary prize can be established in other cases. When winning with an index value IV = 5, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to 44 The first bell prize can be surely established regardless of the operation timing of, and the second supplementary prize can be established in other cases. When winning with an index value IV = 6, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to 44 The first bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of, and in other cases, the fifth supplementary prize can be established.

In the slot machine 10, reel control capable of sliding up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In other words, reel control for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated until a predetermined time (190 milliseconds) elapses. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to easily establish a prize corresponding to the winning combination, and it is possible to prevent the winning corresponding to the unwinning combination from being established. It becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, a combination of symbols for establishing a prize is formed in one reel 32L, 32M, 32R. If there are five or more symbols between the constituent symbols, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main lines ML1 to ML5 depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (the event is so-called "missed"). Also called). The first bell prize, the second bell prize, and various replay prizes are prize modes in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not missed when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order. The watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, the cherry prize, the BB prize, and the RB prize are prize modes in which omission may occur depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The index value IV = 7 to 9 is set with the second bell winning data and any of the seventh to ninth supplementary winning data. When winning with an index value IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 18, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R and each of them. The second bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the seventh supplementary prize can be established. When the index value IV = 8 is won, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped second and the reels 32M, 32R to be stopped third, and the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. The second bell prize can be surely established regardless of the timing, and the ninth supplementary prize can be established in other cases. When winning with an index value IV = 9, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped second and the reels 32M, 32R to be stopped third, and the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44. The second bell prize can be surely established regardless of the timing, and the eighth supplementary prize can be established in other cases.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the index value IV = 10 is set with the first bell winning data and the special bell winning data. When winning with an index value IV = 10, as shown in FIG. 18, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R and each of them. The first bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. On the other hand, when the first stop is either the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the special bell prize can be established regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped second and the third stop. However, the special bell prize cannot be established depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, the first bell winning is established regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the second stop target and the third stop target and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. That is, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 10 and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, the establishment of the special bell winning is prioritized and the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are performed. When the special bell prize cannot be established due to the timing, the first bell prize is surely established.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, only the first watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 11. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 11, as shown in FIG. 18, the first watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first watermelon winning may not be established. As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, only the second watermelon winning data is set at the index value IV = 12. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 12, as shown in FIG. 18, the second watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second watermelon winning may not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, only the cherry winning data is set in the index value IV = 13. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 13, as shown in FIG. 18, the cherry winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L, the cherry winning may not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, only the first chance replay winning data is set in the index value IV = 14. When winning with an index value IV = 14, as shown in FIG. 18, the first chance replay winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. do. Further, as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, only the second chance replay winning data is set in the index value IV = 15. When winning with an index value IV = 15, as shown in FIG. 18, the second chance replay winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. do.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, normal replay winning data and special replay winning data are set at the index value IV = 16. When winning with an index value IV = 16, as shown in FIG. 18, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R and each of them. Regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the normal replay winning is surely established. On the other hand, when the first stop is either the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, a special replay prize can be established regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped second and the third stop. However, the special replay prize cannot be established depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L. If the left stop button 42 is operated at an operation timing in which the special replay prize is not established, the normal replay prize is surely established. That is, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 16 and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, the establishment of the special replay winning is prioritized, and the operation timing of the left stop button 42 and If the special replay prize cannot be established due to the above, the normal replay prize is definitely established.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, only the normal replay winning data is set at the index value IV = 17. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 17, as shown in FIG. 18, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, cherry winning data and BB winning data are set at the index value IV = 18. When winning with an index value IV = 18, as shown in FIG. 18, cherry winning or BB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 18, the establishment of the BB prize is prioritized regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when the establishment of the BB prize becomes impossible. If it is done, the establishment of the cherry prize will be prioritized. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, neither the cherry prize nor the BB prize may be established. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 18, the establishment of the cherry prize is prioritized regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the establishment of the cherry prize is not possible. When the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when the BB prize is established, the establishment of the BB prize may be prioritized.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, only the BB winning data is set at the index value IV = 19. When winning with an index value IV = 19, as shown in FIG. 18, BB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the BB prize will not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, cherry winning data and RB winning data are set at the index value IV = 20. When winning with an index value IV = 20, as shown in FIG. 18, cherry winning or RB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 20, the establishment of the RB prize is prioritized regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when the establishment of the RB prize becomes impossible. If it is done, the establishment of the cherry prize will be prioritized. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, neither the cherry prize nor the RB prize may be established. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 20, the establishment of the cherry prize is prioritized regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the establishment of the cherry prize is not possible. When the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when the RB prize is established, the establishment of the RB prize may be prioritized.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, only the RB winning data is set in the index value IV = 21. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 21, as shown in FIG. 18, the RB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the RB winning will not be established.

Here, the winning data other than the BB winning data and the RB winning data are deleted in the winning game regardless of whether or not the corresponding winning is established, and are held in the subsequent games of the winning game. Not over. On the other hand, the BB winning data and the RB winning data receive the corresponding prizes even in the next and subsequent games of the winning game, except when the main RAM 74 is completely cleared (step S105). The memory is retained until it is established. In this case, even if the game is in a state where either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to each of the BB winning data and the RB winning data (specifically, the index value IV). = 18 to 21) are subject to lottery, but even if the index value IV is won, the BB winning data and the RB winning data corresponding to the winning index value IV are newly stored in the main RAM 74. There is no such thing. This makes it possible to prevent the BB winning data and the RB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

The probability of winning when the index values IV = 1 to 15, 18 to 21 is determined by selecting the winning combination lottery table in the non-bonus state of FIG. 16 and selecting the winning combination lottery table in the RT state of FIG. It is the same as the case. Specifically, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 1, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 2, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 3, and the index value IV = 4 Probability of winning when index value IV = 5, probability of winning when index value IV = 6, probability of winning when index value IV = 7, index value IV = The probability of winning when the value is 8 and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 9 are about 1/21.8, respectively. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 10 is about 1/728, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 11 is about 1/164, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 12 The probability of winning is about 1/146, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 13 is about 1/423, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 14 is about 1/328. Yes, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 15 is about 1/164. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 18 is about 1/437, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 19 is about 1/437, and when the index value IV = 20. The probability of winning is about 1/655, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 21 is about 1/655.

On the other hand, the probability of winning when the index values IV = 16 and 17 is such that the winning combination lottery table in the RT state of FIG. 17 is selected rather than the winning combination lottery table in the non-bonus state of FIG. The case is higher. Specifically, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 16 is about 1/21.8 when the winning combination lottery table in the non-bonus state of FIG. 16 is selected, whereas the probability of winning is about 1/21.8, whereas that of FIG. 17 shows. When the winning combination lottery table in the RT state is selected, it is about 1 / 6.55. Further, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 17 is about 1 / 10.9 when the winning combination lottery table in the non-bonus state of FIG. 16 is selected, whereas it is in the RT state of FIG. When the winning combination lottery table is selected, it is about 1 / 3.28. The tendency of the winning probability as described above is not limited to the case where the set value is "3", and the same applies to other set values.

Returning to the explanation of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), after selecting the lottery table in step S502 and setting the index value IV to 1 (step S503), the determination value DV used when determining the winning or not of the winning combination is set. Set (step S504). In such a determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the value of the random number acquired in step S501 is set as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the index value IV = 1, which is the current index value IV, corresponds to the value of this random number. Is added to obtain a new determination value DV.

After that, it is determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the index value IV (step S505). In the winning / failing determination of the winning combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds "65535". When "65535" is exceeded (step S505: YES), the winning data acquisition process for setting the winning data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S506).

When the determination value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S505: NO), it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, after adding 1 to the index value IV (step S507), it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined as to whether or not the index value IV is correct (step S508). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined as to whether or not it is correct, the process returns to step S504 and the determination of whether or not the winning combination is successful is continued. At this time, in step S504, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S505, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

When the process of step S506 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S508, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In this case, the first stop information setting process for setting the stop information for reel stop control is performed (step S509). After that, the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed in step S510, the first control process of the game section is executed in step S511, and the stop order notification control process is executed in step S512. The processing contents of steps S510 to S512 will be described in detail later.

After that, the game start command transmission process is executed (step S513). In the transmission process, if any of the winning roles is won in the lottery process of this winning combination (FIG. 15), the information corresponding to the winning combination and the information corresponding to the current gaming state. And the information corresponding to the processing results of step S510 and step S511 are set in the game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. The game start command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that a new game has started, and is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize various information determined by the main side MPU 72. ..

When the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command, it grasps various information in the current game from the game start command. Then, the production side MPU 92 determines the content of the production in a manner corresponding to the various information grasped. Then, a data table corresponding to the determined content of the effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94, and according to the read data table, the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 are performed. Take control.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a winning data acquisition process executed in step S506.

It is determined whether or not any of the index values IV = 18 to 21 has been won in the lottery process of this combination (step S601). When a negative determination is made in step S601, the winning data set corresponding to the index value IV won this time is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S608). When any of the index values IV = 18 to 21 is won in the lottery process of this combination (step S601: YES), it is determined whether or not the BB winning data or the RB winning data is already stored in the main RAM 74. (Step S602).

If both the BB winning data and the RB winning data are not stored in the main RAM 74 (step S602: NO), and if the index value IV = 18 or 19 is won (step S603: YES), the BB winning data is won. If the data is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S604) and the index value IV = 20 or 21 is won (step S603: NO), the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S605). Then, if the process of step S604 or step S605 is executed and the index value IV = 18 or 20 is won (step S606: YES), the cherry winning data is further stored in the main RAM 74 (step). S607). As a result, in a situation where both the BB winning data and the RB winning data are not stored in the main RAM 74, when the index value IV = 18 is won, both the cherry winning data and the BB winning data are stored in the main RAM 74. When the index value IV = 19 is won, the BB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and when the index value IV = 20 is won, both the cherry winning data and the RB winning data are stored in the main RAM 74. It is stored, and when the index value IV = 21 is won, the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

On the other hand, when either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S602: YES), the processes of steps S603 to S605 are not executed. Then, if the index value IV = 18 or 20 is won (step S606: YES), the cherry winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S607). As a result, in the situation where either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, even if any of the index values IV = 18 to 21 is won, the BB winning data or the RB is triggered by the winning. The winning data is not newly stored in the main RAM 74. However, since the index value IV = 18 is set not only the BB winning data but also the cherry winning data, and the index value IV = 20 is set not only the RB winning data but also the cherry winning data, the index value IV is set. When = 18 or 20 is won, the cherry winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 even if either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is already stored in the main RAM 74.

When either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 as described above, even if the winning is performed with any of the index values IV = 18 to 21, the BB winning is triggered by the winning. Depending on whether either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 by setting the processing by the program so that the data or the RB winning data is not newly stored in the main RAM 74. It is possible to prevent the BB winning data and the RB winning data from being cumulatively stored in the main RAM 74 without changing the type of the winning combination lottery table. By not changing the type of the winning combination lottery table depending on whether or not either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the winning combination lottery according to the presence or absence of the winning data is stored. Since it is not necessary to prepare a table, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for storing the winning combination lottery table.

When either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, even if the winning is performed with any of the index values IV = 18 to 21, the BB winning data or the RB winning is triggered by the winning. Even if the data is not newly stored in the main RAM 74, if either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 and the index value IV = 18 or 20 is won. The cherry winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. As a result, the cherry winning data is selectively stored, and the probability that the cherry winning data is stored varies depending on whether or not either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

<Reel control processing>
Next, the reel control process executed in step S313 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described. Prior to the description of the reel control process, the stepping motor 33 for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described in more detail.

FIG. 20A is a connection diagram showing the drive system of the stepping motor 33, and FIG. 20B is a diagram showing the drive characteristics of the stepping motor 33. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of phase excitation.

As the stepping motor 33, a hybrid (HB) type two-phase stepping motor is used. The stepping motor is not limited to the hybrid type, and various stepping motors can be used.

As shown in FIG. 20A, the hybrid type stepping motor 33 has a rotor 85 arranged in the center and a stator 86 having the first to fourth poles 86a to 86d arranged around the rotor 85. And have. The rotor 85 is composed of a front rotor 85a magnetized on the north pole and a back rotor 85b magnetized on the south pole, and teeth and teeth provided around the front rotor 85a. It is attached to the rotating shaft in a state of being relatively shifted by 1/2 pitch so that the teeth provided around the rear rotor 85b are located between the rotors. A cylindrical magnet (not shown) is attached between the front rotor 85a and the rear rotor 85b.

As shown in FIG. 20B, the exciting coil L0 and the exciting coil L2 are bifilar wound around the first pole 86a and the third pole 86c, and the winding end end of the exciting coil L0 and the winding start end of the exciting coil L2. Is connected, and a predetermined DC power supply + B (for example, +24 volt) is applied to this. Similarly, the exciting coil L1 and the exciting coil L3 are bifilar wound around the second pole 86b and the fourth pole 86d, and the winding end end of the exciting coil L1 and the winding start end of the exciting coil L3 are connected to each other. Power supply + B is applied.

An excitation signal is applied to the exciting coil L0 of the first pole 86a, the first pole 86a is excited to the S pole, and the third pole 86c is excited to the N pole. A phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the exciting coil L2 of 86c to excite the first pole 86a to the N pole and the third pole 86c to the S pole is referred to as an inverse A phase. Similarly, an excitation signal is applied to the exciting coil L1 of the second pole 86b, the phase that excites the second pole 86b to the S pole and the fourth pole 86d to the N pole is defined as the B phase, and vice versa. A phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the exciting coil L3 of the fourth pole 86d to excite the second pole 86b to the N pole and the fourth pole 86d to the S pole is referred to as an inverted B phase.

The excitation signal for the stepping motor 33 is given to the motor driver 87 shown in FIG. 20B as excitation data. This excitation data is stored in the main RAM 74, and appropriate excitation data is output by timer interrupt processing. The excitation phase for the stepping motor 33 is determined by this excitation data, and an excitation signal (current) is applied to the excitation phase.

When the stepping motor 33 is a one-phase excitation drive system, the rotor 85 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by sequentially applying excitation signals to the A phase, the B phase, the inverse A phase, and the inverse B phase. It can be driven to rotate. That is, for example, when the A phase is first energized, the protrusion of the first pole 86a and the tooth of the front rotor 85a which became the S pole, the protrusion of the third pole 86c which became the north pole and the tooth of the back rotor 85b When they face each other by suction force and then energize the B phase, the protrusion of the second pole 86b that became the S pole and the teeth of the front rotor 85a, and the protrusion of the fourth pole 86d that became the north pole and the back rotation When the teeth of the child 85b face each other by suction force and then the reverse A phase is energized, the protrusion of the first pole 86a that becomes the north pole, the tooth of the back rotor 85b, and the third pole 86c that becomes the south pole The protrusions and the teeth of the front rotor 85a face each other by suction force, and then when the reverse B phase is energized, the protrusions of the second pole 86b, which has become the north pole, and the teeth of the rear rotor 85b, and the S pole The protrusion of the 4th pole 86d and the teeth of the front rotor 85a face each other by suction force. By exciting in this order, the rotor 85 rotates clockwise in FIG. 20 (a).

In this slot machine 10, one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternated in the acceleration period from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation and the period for maintaining the constant speed rotation. The 1-2 phase excitation drive performed in 1 is adopted. In the 1-2 phase excitation drive, excitation is performed according to the following excitation sequences (excitation order) of (1) to (8). That is, since the excitation of only one set is the one-phase excitation and the excitation of the two phases is the two-phase excitation at the same time, as shown in FIG. (1 phase excitation), (2) both A and B phases are energized (2-phase excitation), and so on, (3) B phase is energized, and (4) both B phase and inverse A phase are energized. Energize, (5) energize the reverse A phase, (6) energize both the reverse A phase and the reverse B phase, (7) energize the reverse B phase, and (8) both the reverse B phase and the A phase. It is a drive system that energizes the power and then returns to (1). In the present embodiment, the reel makes one revolution by outputting 504 pulses of the exciting signal for switching the exciting phase. Therefore, the angle change based on the one-pulse exciting signal (that is, one switching of the exciting phase). That is, the angle change per step is about 0.714 °.

FIG. 22A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an acceleration table in which an excitation pattern is set when the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started.

As the initial excitation phase at the time of acceleration, in addition to the one-phase excitation that drives only a specific excitation phase, a two-phase excitation that drives two specific excitation phases at the same time can be considered. Although it depends on the size of the reel and the inertia, it is possible to accelerate the reel from zero at the initial speed even with one-phase excitation if it is a normal slot machine. However, since the two-phase excitation has a larger rotational torque than the one-phase excitation, the two-phase excitation is preferable for the initial excitation in order to obtain a sufficient initial velocity.

In the excitation pattern shown in FIG. 22 (a), this excited state is maintained for 130 interrupts after setting the two-phase excitation in synchronization with the interrupt timing every 1.49 milliseconds. For the two-phase excitation as the initial excitation, the excitation order corresponding to the excitation phase at the time of the previous rotation stop is selected from the excitation order 2, the excitation order 4, the excitation order 6, and the excitation order 8 shown in FIG. It will be.

After holding the state of two-phase excitation over 130 interrupts of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), 1-2 phase excitation is repeated alternately, as shown in FIG. 22 (a) as the holding period of phase excitation. The excitation holding period of 1-phase excitation and the excitation holding period of 2-phase excitation are finely controlled. Specifically, the one-phase excitation following the two-phase excitation, which is the initial excitation, is performed for eight interrupts of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the next two-phase excitation is performed for only seven interrupts of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). The retention period is set to be gradually shortened so that it is performed. Finally, 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of 2 interrupts in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and finally, 1-phase excitation becomes 2 interrupts in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). It is set to be done over. Since the end of the acceleration table is one-phase excitation in this way, the type of first phase excitation in the constant speed rotation period is two-phase excitation. By sequentially shortening the holding period in each phase excitation as it approaches the constant speed rotation, high-speed acceleration processing can be realized in a short time, and a smooth transition to the constant speed rotation becomes possible. In constant speed rotation, one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of one interrupt in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

Four-phase excitation is used to stop the stepping motor 33. In 4-phase excitation, all of the A phase, the inverse A phase, the B phase and the inverse B phase are excited. When two opposite phases are excited, the magnetic fluxes cancel each other out, but during the rotation of the stepping motor 33, a counter electromotive force is generated by the induced voltage, for example, the torque of the difference between the currents flowing in the A phase and the inverse A phase. Occurs. Then, in the case of 4-phase excitation, the torque is generated between the two opposing phases. Therefore, it is possible to generate a braking force even with 4-phase excitation. However, the braking force in the case of 4-phase excitation is smaller than that in the case of 1-phase excitation.

A case where the stepping motor 33 is stopped by using 4-phase excitation will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 22B. FIG. 22B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a stop table in which an excitation pattern is set when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped.

When the stepping motor 33 is stopped, as shown in FIG. 22B, 4-phase excitation is started by issuing a stop command in a situation where 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are alternately repeated. .. In this case, the timing at which the four-phase excitation is started is defined as the timing after the two-phase excitation is executed over one interrupt. This four-phase excitation is continued for 100 interrupts (149 ms). Then, after performing 4-phase excitation over 100 interrupts, 1-phase excitation is performed over 34 interrupts (50.7 milliseconds), and then the 1-phase excitation is terminated. The target phase of this one-phase excitation is one phase corresponding to the position of the target stop angle.

As described above, the rotor 85 of the stepping motor 33 can be smoothly stopped by using the four-phase excitation having the weakest braking force at the start of braking. However, when four-phase excitation is performed due to the weak braking force, the rotor 85 advances to some extent due to inertia from the timing at which the four-phase excitation is started. The number of steps advanced by this inertia differs depending on the specifications of the reel unit 31, and the number of steps is not constant although it can be grasped to some extent at the design stage by an experiment using the reel unit 31. Some variation can occur. On the other hand, after the 4-phase excitation is performed for a predetermined period, the stop position is set by performing the 1-phase excitation for the 1-phase corresponding to the position of the target stop angle for a predetermined period. It is possible to set it to the designed position.

When grasping the rotation position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the number of steps of the stepping motor 33 is used. Specifically, as described above, in this slot machine 10, 21 symbols are drawn on each belt of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the number of steps required for one rotation is 504 steps. There is. In this case, the number of steps required for switching from one symbol to the next at a predetermined position (the lower position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the range visible from the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R) (that is, The number of steps assigned to each symbol) is constant at 24 steps. Therefore, the number of steps from the time when the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, the number of times the excitation signal of one pulse is output (that is, the number of times the excitation phase is switched). Based on the above, the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are grasped.

Hereinafter, the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.

In the reel control process, it is first determined whether or not a predetermined start weight period (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R was started in the previous game (step S701). ). If the start weight period has not elapsed, the process waits in step S701 until the start weight period elapses. When the start weight period has elapsed, the start weight period for the next game is reset (step S702), and "1" is set in the rotation start flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S703). .. As a result, the stepping motor control process in step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) starts the stepping motor 33 acceleration process, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating.

After that, it is determined whether or not any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S704). If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated, the process of step S704 is repeatedly executed until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the stop buttons 42 to 44 on which the operation has been performed this time among the validity period flags 102a to 102c (see FIG. 24) provided in the main RAM 74 are displayed. It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the corresponding validity period flags 102a to 102c (step S705). The validity period flags 102a to 102c are provided so as to correspond one-to-one with each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 (that is, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R). Each valid period flag 102a to 102c is set to "1" when the rotation of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, the acceleration period is completed, and the constant speed rotation is achieved, and the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32M are set. , When the rotation of 32R is stopped, "0" is cleared. That is, the situation in which "1" is set in the validity period flags 102a to 102c corresponds to the situation in which the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are enabled.

If "1" is not set in the validity period flags 102a to 102c corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 determined to be operated in step S704 (step S705: NO), the process returns to step S704. Therefore, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the validity period flags 102a to 102c in which "1" is not set are operated, the operation is treated as invalid. When "1" is set in the validity period flags 102a to 102c corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 determined to be operated in step S704 (step S705: YES), the stop buttons 42 to 44 this time are set. Means that the operation of is valid. Therefore, the process for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 operated this time is executed.

Specifically, first, the button extinguishing process is executed (step S706). A light emitting portion (not shown) is provided on the back side of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. The light emitting unit is turned on at the timing when the constant speed rotation of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started and the operation of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 is enabled, and the operation of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 is activated. When the control for stopping the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the above, the light is turned off. In the button extinguishing process, all the light emitting units corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 including the stop buttons 42 to 44 operated this time are turned off. When stop control is started for one reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the other reels 32L, 32M, 32R regardless of whether or not "1" is set in the validity period flags 102a to 102c. The operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to is invalidated. In this case, when the stop control is started for one reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the button extinguishing process (step S706) is executed and the stop button 42 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed. By turning off all the stop buttons 42 to 44 including ~ 44, it is possible to make the player recognize that the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is invalidated. Although the details will be described later, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop command has not yet been issued exist at the timing when the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop command has been issued this time is completed. The light emitting portions of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop command has not yet been generated are turned on.

After that, the stop command command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S707). The stop command command is a command for causing the effector MPU 92 to recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to generate the stop command. After that, on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are to be stopped this time, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position (specifically, the lower row) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed. (Step S708). Specifically, the number of pulses of the excitation signal output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 36 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is input (that is, the number of times the excitation phase is switched). To confirm the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base point position. After that, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S709).

In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are slid by one symbol and then stopped, a stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped after being slid by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped after being slid by three symbols, and four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, one is a stopping mode in which the machine is stopped after sliding. Therefore, in step S709, any value of "0" to "4" is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

After that, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined (step S710). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal (step S711), and if they are equal, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R The reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed (step S712). The main RAM 74 is provided with a stop command flag corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on a one-to-one basis. Set "1" to the stop command flag corresponding to 32R. As a result, control for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which are to be stopped this time, is started in the stop control process (FIG. 26) described later.

After that, it is determined whether or not the stops of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which are to be stopped this time, are completed (step S713). The main RAM 74 is provided with stop completion flags 104a to 104c (see FIG. 24) in a one-to-one correspondence with the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the reels 32L, 32M to be stopped this time in step S713. , It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the stop completion flags 104a to 104c corresponding to 32R. If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which are to be stopped this time, have not been stopped, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stand by in step S713. When the stops of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time are completed (step S713: YES), it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S714). If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed (step S715).

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 15) of the winning combination, and by using the stop information. , It is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is stopped. As the stop information, the slide number data indicating the correspondence relationship between each symbol and the slide number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the slide number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. ..

As the process for setting the stop information, the stop information first setting process executed in step S509 of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) and the stop information first setting process executed in step S715 of the reel control process (FIG. 23) are executed. There is a stop information second setting process. In the stop information first setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. The stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the stop information first setting process or the previous stop information second setting process after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the stop result of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, 32R. ..

After executing the stop information second setting process in step S715, the freeze process is executed in steps S716 to S720, and the process returns to step S704. The process for freezing in steps S716 to S720 will be described later.

If it is determined in step S714 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the winning determination process is executed in step S721. In the winning determination process, the types of symbols stopped on the main lines ML1 to ML5 on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are grasped. Then, based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main RAM 74, the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on any of the main lines ML1 to ML5 on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is won in the winning combination lottery process. It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, and if the combination of the symbols corresponds to the winning combination, the winning combination process is executed as the winning combination is established.

In the winning processing, if the winning is a small winning combination, information on the number of game media to be granted is set in the main RAM 74 so that the gaming media can be granted in the medium granting process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed so that the re-game setting process is executed in the setting process at the end of the game in step S319 of the normal process (FIG. 13).

After the winning determination process is executed, the winning result command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S722). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not the winning is successful this time, and if the winning is successful, data indicating the type of the winning is included.

Next, a configuration for rotating and controlling each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area of the main RAM 74 used for executing the rotation control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

As shown in FIG. 24, the main RAM 74 is provided with acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c. As the acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c, the left acceleration completion flag 101a corresponds to the left reel 32L, the middle acceleration completion flag 101b corresponds to the middle reel 32M, and the right acceleration completion flag 101c corresponds to the right reel 32R. And are provided. When the acceleration period of the left reel 32L is completed and the constant speed rotation is started after the rotation of the left reel 32L is started, "1" is set in the left acceleration completion flag 101a, and the left reel 32L When the stop is completed, the left acceleration completion flag 101a is cleared to "0". When the acceleration period of the middle reel 32M is completed and the constant speed rotation is started after the rotation of the middle reel 32M is started, "1" is set in the middle reel acceleration completion flag 101b, and the middle reel 32M is set. When the stop of is completed, the intermediate acceleration completion flag 101b is cleared to "0". When the acceleration period of the right reel 32R is completed and the constant speed rotation is started after the rotation of the right reel 32R is started, "1" is set in the right acceleration completion flag 101c and the right reel 32R is set. When the stop of is completed, the right acceleration completion flag 101c is cleared to "0".

The main RAM 74 is provided with validity period flags 102a to 102c. As the validity period flags 102a to 102c, the left validity period flag 102a corresponds to the left reel 32L, the middle validity period flag 102b corresponds to the middle reel 32M, and the right validity period flag 102c corresponds to the right reel 32R. And are provided. When the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 corresponding to the left reel 32L after the constant speed rotation of the left reel 32L is started, "1" is set in the left validity period flag 102a and the left When the stop of the reel 32L is completed, the left valid period flag 102a is cleared to "0". When the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 corresponding to the middle reel 32M after the constant speed rotation of the middle reel 32M is started, "1" is set in the middle effective period flag 102b. When the stop of the middle reel 32M is completed, the middle use validity period flag 102b is cleared to "0". When the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 corresponding to the right reel 32R after the constant speed rotation of the right reel 32R is started, "1" is set in the right valid period flag 102c. When the stop of the right reel 32R is completed, the right valid period flag 102c is cleared to "0".

The main RAM 74 is provided with stop instruction flags 103a to 103c. As the stop instruction flags 103a to 103c, the left stop instruction flag 103a corresponds to the left reel 32L, the middle stop instruction flag 103b corresponds to the middle reel 32M, and the right stop instruction flag 103c corresponds to the right reel 32R. And are provided. Left stop when the reel stop process (step S712) of the reel control process (FIG. 23) is executed based on the operation of the left stop button 42 in the situation where "1" is set in the left validity period flag 102a. When the instruction flag 103a is set to "1" and the stop of the left reel 32L is completed, the left stop instruction flag 103a is cleared to "0". Medium when the reel stop process (step S712) of the reel control process (FIG. 23) is executed based on the operation of the middle stop button 43 in the situation where "1" is set in the intermediate valid period flag 102b. “1” is set in the stop instruction flag 103b, and “0” is cleared when the stop of the middle reel 32M is completed. Right when the reel stop process (step S712) of the reel control process (FIG. 23) is executed based on the operation of the right stop button 44 in the situation where "1" is set in the right valid period flag 102c. "1" is set in the stop instruction flag 103c, and when the stop of the right reel 32R is completed, the stop instruction flag 103c for the right is cleared to "0".

The main RAM 74 is provided with stop completion flags 104a to 104c. As the stop completion flags 104a to 104c, the left stop completion flag 104a corresponds to the left reel 32L, the middle stop completion flag 104b corresponds to the middle reel 32M, and the right stop completion flag 104c corresponds to the right reel 32R. And are provided. When the stop of the left reel 32L is completed, "1" is set in the left stop completion flag 104a, the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, and a positive determination is made in step S714 of the reel control process (FIG. 23). When this is done, the left stop completion flag 104a is cleared to "0". When the stop of the middle reel 32M is completed, "1" is set in the middle reel stop completion flag 104b, the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, and the result is affirmed in step S714 of the reel control process (FIG. 23). When the determination is made, the intermediate stop completion flag 104b is cleared to "0". When the stop of the right reel 32R is completed, "1" is set in the right stop completion flag 104c, the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, and the result is affirmed in step S714 of the reel control process (FIG. 23). When the determination is made, the right stop completion flag 104c is cleared to "0".

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a stepping motor control process executed in step S206 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the rotating flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S801). The rotating flag is set to "1" when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, and is cleared to "0" when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. When "1" is not set in the rotating flag (step S801: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the rotation start flag of the main RAM 74 (step S802). As described above, when it is determined in the reel control process (FIG. 23) that the start weight period has elapsed (step S701: YES), "1" is set in the rotation start flag in step S703.

When "1" is set in the rotation start flag (step S802: YES), the acceleration table shown in FIG. 22A is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S803). In this case, the acceleration table is read individually for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed (step S804). In the rotation start process, two-phase excitation is started for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R according to the data set in the first acceleration order of the acceleration table. After that, "1" is set to the rotating flag of the main RAM 74 (step S805), and the rotation start flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S806).

When "1" is set in the rotating flag of the main RAM 74 (step S801: YES), "1" is set in the target reel counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S807). The target reel counter is a counter for specifying the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be executed in the processes of steps S808 to S821 by the main MPU 72. When the value of the target reel counter is "1", the left reel 32L is the execution target of the processes of steps S808 to S821, and when the value of the target reel counter is "2", the middle reel 32M is the step S808 to step. When the processing of S821 is the execution target and the value of the target reel counter is "3", the right reel 32R is the execution target of the processing of steps S808 to S821.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the stop completion flags 104a to 104c of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter (step S808). When an affirmative determination is made in step S808, it means that the stops of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current values of the target reel counters have already been completed, so the processes of steps S809 to S821 are executed. The process proceeds to step S822 without fail.

When a negative determination is made in step S808, when "1" is set in the stop instruction flags 103a to 103c of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter (step S809: YES). ), The stop control process is executed (step S810), and the valid period flags of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values although "1" is not set in the stop instruction flags 103a to 103c. When "1" is set in 102a to 102c (step S811: YES), the constant speed control process is executed (step S812). These constant speed control processing and stop control processing will be described later.

When "1" is not set in the validity period flags 102a to 102c of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the value of the current target reel counter (step S811: NO), it corresponds to the value of the current target reel counter. It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R (step S813). If a negative determination is made in step S813, the acceleration control process is executed (step S814). In the acceleration control process, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current values of the target reel counters are accelerated according to the acceleration table shown in FIG. 22A. In this case, since the acceleration table is read individually for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, acceleration is performed individually for each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

After that, it is determined whether or not the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter is completed (step S815). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the one-phase excitation in the 24th acceleration order is maintained over two interrupts in the acceleration table read corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. When the acceleration is completed (step S815: YES), “1” is set in the acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current values of the target reel counters (step S816). That is, the process of setting "1" for the acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c is performed individually for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. When "1" is set in the corresponding acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c and "1" is not set in the corresponding validity period flags 102a to 102c, the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are accelerated. Although completed, the sensor cut van 37 is not detected by the reel index sensor 36 of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

When "1" is set in the corresponding acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c (step S813: YES), the constant speed control process is executed (step S817). In the constant speed control process, the excitation phase is switched by outputting a one-pulse excitation signal so that one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of one interrupt in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). After that, it is determined whether or not the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the value of the current target reel counter (step S818). When the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 (step S818: YES), "1" is set in the validity period flags 102a to 102c of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current values of the target reel counters. (Step S819). As a result, the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current values of the target reel counters are enabled.

Here, at the timing when the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 after the constant speed rotation is started, the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started at the same time, and the same acceleration table is used. Even if the acceleration control is performed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be different depending on the previous stop position. On the other hand, the processes of steps S818 and S819, that is, the process of setting the validity period flags 102a to 102c to "1" when the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36, are the reels 32L, 32M, respectively. It is done individually for 32R. Therefore, the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated is different for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be started earlier than the configuration in which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at the same time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current values of the target reel counters are already lit (step S820). Since the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are off, basically the corresponding stop button is used when "1" is set in the validity period flags 102a to 102c. 42 to 44 are in the off state. Therefore, basically, a negative determination is made in step S820, and the button lighting process is executed (step S821). In the button lighting process, the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the values of the current target reel counter are switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the stop buttons 42 to 44 for which the operation is enabled are sequentially switched from the off state to the on state, and the player can easily recognize the stop buttons 42 to 44 for which the operation is valid.

On the other hand, when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not normally performed due to step-out or the like, the reel 32L whose rotation is abnormal is executed by the step-out handling process (step S824) described later. , 32M, 32R are re-accelerated. In this case, it corresponds until the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed, the constant speed rotation is started, and the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are not enabled. On the other hand, in the step-out handling process (step S824) described later, the process for turning off the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which are the targets of re-acceleration, is not executed. Therefore, in a situation where the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is already enabled and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are in the light emitting state, re-acceleration is performed by the occurrence of a rotation abnormality in the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If so, the lighting state of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is maintained even before the operation is activated. Therefore, when the process of step S819 is executed based on such re-acceleration, the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 are already lit, so that a positive determination is made in step S820 and step S821. Do not execute the processing of.

When "1" is set in the validity period flags 102a to 102c of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter (step S811: YES), the constant speed control process is executed (step). S812). In the constant speed control process, as in the constant speed control process in step S817, one pulse is generated so that one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of one interrupt in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). The excitation signal of is output to switch the excitation phase. As a result, the constant speed rotation of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R is maintained in the state where the operation of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 is enabled. Then, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are operated in this situation, the reel stop processing is executed in step S712 of the reel control processing (FIG. 23). "1" is set in the stop instruction flags 103a to 103c.

In the stepping motor control process (FIG. 25), when "1" is set in the stop instruction flags 103a to 103c of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current values of the target reel counters (step S809: YES). The stop control process is executed (step S810).

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the stop control process.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the stop control in-progress flag provided in the main RAM 74 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value (step S901). .. The stop control in-progress flag is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the main MPU 72 specifies whether or not the stop control for the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R has been started. Used to do. When "1" is not set in the corresponding stop control flag (step S901: NO), the stop table shown in FIG. 22B is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S902). This read stop table is used to stop the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter, and when starting stop control for the other reels 32L, 32M, 32R, The stop table is newly read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74. After that, "1" is set in the stop control flag of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter (step S903).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S901, or when the process of step S903 is executed, the stop control execution process is executed (step S904). In the stop control execution process, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current values of the target reel counters are stopped according to the stop table shown in FIG. 22B.

After that, it is determined whether or not the stop of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter is completed (step S905). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the one-phase excitation, which is the last excitation order, is maintained over 34 interrupts in the stop table read corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. When the stop is completed (step S905: YES), various flag clearing processes are executed (step S906). In the various flag clearing processes, the acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c, the validity period flags 102a to 102c, the stop instruction flags 103a to 103c, and the stop control in-progress flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the values of the current target reel counters are set to ". "0" is cleared. Then, "1" is set in the stop completion flags 104a to 104c of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter (step S907). As a result, even if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be controlled in the stepping motor control process (FIG. 25), affirmative determination is made in step S808, whereby steps S809 to S821 Will not be executed.

After that, by determining whether or not "1" is set in all of the stop completion flags 104a to 104c, it is determined whether or not the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has stopped (step S908). .. When a negative determination is made in step S908, the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in which "1" is set in the validity period flags 102a to 102c are switched from the off state to the on state ( Step S909). As described above, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are turned on when the operation is activated, but when the stop control for one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, the reel control process (FIG. 23). By executing the button extinguishing process in step S706 of the above, even the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are turned off. On the other hand, by executing the button lighting process in step S909, the stop of the rotation of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is completed, and the stop operation of the remaining reels 32L, 32M, 32R is enabled. In that case, it is possible to turn on the stop buttons 42 to 44 in which the stop operation is enabled correspondingly. On the other hand, when the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped (step S908: YES), the rotating flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S910).

Returning to the description of the stepping motor control process (FIG. 25), when an affirmative determination is made in step S808, when the process of step S810 is executed, when the process of step S812 is executed, and when a negative determination is made in step S815. , When the process of step S816 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S818, when an affirmative determination is made in step S820, or when the process of step S821 is executed, the value of the target reel counter of the main RAM 74 is set to 1. Add (step S822). When the value of the target reel counter after 1 addition is 3 or less (step S823: NO), the process returns to step S808. As a result, the processes of steps S808 to S821 are executed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R whose rotation control is to be executed in the next order. When the value of the target reel counter after 1 addition is "4" (step S823: YES), the stepping motor control process ends after the step-out handling process is executed in step S824.

In the step-out handling process, the number of steps measured since the sensor cut van 37 was last detected by the reel index sensor 36 for each of the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R is set as a number larger than the number of steps for one lap. It is determined whether or not the number of reference steps is equal to or greater than the specified number of steps. If the number of steps is equal to or greater than the reference number, there is a high possibility that a rotation abnormality such as step-out has occurred for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Therefore, the acceleration completion flag corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R The 101a to 101c, the validity period flag 102a to 102c, the stop instruction flag 103a to 103c, and the stop control in-progress flag are cleared to "0", and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are re-processed in steps S803 and S804. Start accelerating. In this case, the re-acceleration process is not executed for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R other than the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the rotation abnormality is specified. Further, in the step-out handling process, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are not turned off, including the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which are the targets of the reacceleration process. Therefore, even if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 in the lit state are subject to reacceleration, the lit state of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is maintained.

Next, how the rotation control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 27. FIG. 27 (a) shows the rotation state of the left reel 32L, and FIG. 27 (b) shows the reel index sensor 36 provided corresponding to the left reel 32L after the sensor cut van 37 completes the acceleration of the left reel 32L. The timing of the first detection is shown, FIG. 27 (c) shows the state of the left valid period flag 102a, FIG. 27 (d) shows the rotation status of the middle reel 32M, and FIG. 27 (e) shows the middle reel 32M. The corresponding reel index sensor 36 shows the timing at which the sensor cut van 37 is first detected after the acceleration of the middle reel 32M is completed, and FIG. 27 (f) shows the state of the medium use validity period flag 102b. 27 (g) shows the rotation status of the right reel 32R, and FIG. 27 (h) shows the acceleration of the right reel 32R by the sensor cut van 37 at the reel index sensor 36 provided corresponding to the right reel 32R. The timing of the first detection later is shown, FIG. 27 (i) shows the state of the right valid period flag 102c, and FIG. 27 (j) shows the period during which at least one stop button 42 to 44 is lit. Is shown.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 27 (a), 27 (d) and 27 (g), the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started. In this case, acceleration control based on the acceleration table is executed for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Then, at the timing of t2, acceleration is completed in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and constant speed rotation is started. The timing at which acceleration is completed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not limited to the same or substantially the same configuration, and may differ from each other in relation to the rotation position when starting acceleration control. It may be the configuration to obtain.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the sensor cut van 37 is first used by the reel index sensor 36 of the left reel 32L at the timing of t3, which is the situation where constant speed rotation is performed on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Is detected and the rotation position of the left reel 32L becomes the rotation initial position, so that “1” is set in the left valid period flag 102a as shown in FIG. 27 (c). As a result, the operation of the left stop button 42 with respect to the left reel 32L is enabled. Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (j), the left stop button 42 is switched from the off state to the lit state, so that the player is notified that the operation of the left stop button 42 is effective. However, the middle stop button 43 and the right stop button 44 are maintained in the off state. When the left stop button 42 is operated from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, the operation of the middle stop button 43 on the middle reel 32M and the operation of the right stop button 44 on the right reel 32R are not enabled. Even so, the stop control of the left reel 32L is started.

After that, the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 of the right reel 32R as shown in FIG. 27 (h) at the timing of t4, which is the situation where constant speed rotation is performed on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the rotation position of the right reel 32R becomes the rotation initial position, “1” is set in the right valid period flag 102c as shown in FIG. 27 (i). As a result, the operation of the right stop button 44 with respect to the right reel 32R is enabled. Further, by switching the right stop button 44 from the off state to the on state, the player is notified that the operation of the right stop button 44 is effective. However, the middle stop button 43 is maintained in the extinguished state. When the right stop button 44 is operated from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5, the right reel 32R is stopped even if the operation of the middle stop button 43 with respect to the middle reel 32M is not enabled. Control is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 of the middle reel 32M at the timing of t5, which is the situation where constant speed rotation is performed on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the rotation position of the middle reel 32M becomes the rotation initial position, “1” is set in the middle use effective period flag 102b as shown in FIG. 27 (f). As a result, the operation of the middle stop button 43 on the middle reel 32M is enabled. Further, by switching the middle stop button 43 from the off state to the lit state, the player is notified that the operation of the middle stop button 43 is effective.

After that, when the left stop button 42 is operated, the stop control of the left reel 32L is started at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 27 (a), and the left valid period flag is started as shown in FIG. 27 (c). 102a is cleared to "0", and at the timing of t7, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped as shown in FIG. 27A. In this case, since the stop control of the left reel 32L is executed from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7, the operation of the middle stop button 43 on the middle reel 32M and the operation of the right stop button 44 on the right reel 32R are invalidated. .. Therefore, from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7, all the stop buttons 42 to 44 are turned off as shown in FIG. 27 (j). Then, when the stop control of the left reel 32L is completed at the timing of t7, the operation of the middle stop button 43 on the middle reel 32M and the operation of the right stop button 44 on the right reel 32R become effective. Further, at the timing of t7, the middle stop button 43 and the right stop button 44 are turned on again as shown in FIG. 27 (j).

After that, when the middle stop button 43 is operated, the stop control of the middle reel 32M is started at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 27 (d), and the middle use valid period is started as shown in FIG. 27 (f). The flag 102b is cleared to "0", and the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 27 (d). In this case, since the stop control of the middle reel 32M is executed from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9, the operation of the right stop button 44 with respect to the right reel 32R is invalidated. Therefore, from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9, all the stop buttons 42 to 44 are turned off as shown in FIG. 27 (j). Then, when the stop control of the middle reel 32M is completed at the timing of t9, the operation of the right stop button 44 with respect to the right reel 32R becomes effective. Further, at the timing of t9, the right stop button 44 is turned on again as shown in FIG. 27 (j).

After that, when the right stop button 44 is operated, the stop control of the right reel 32R is started at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 27 (g), and the right effective period is started as shown in FIG. 27 (i). The flag 102c is cleared to "0", and the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 27 (g). Further, at the timing of t10, the right stop button 44 is turned off as shown in FIG. 27 (j).

As described above, when the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36, the process of setting the validity period flags 102a to 102c to "1" is performed individually for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Therefore, the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated is different for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be started earlier than the configuration in which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at the same time.

Here, in a situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified, the stop operation for the left reel 32L is generally performed first. Further, when the stop operation for the left reel 32L is performed first in the situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified, the left stop button 42 is operated at the timing when the cherry winning is not missed. .. As shown in the explanatory diagram for explaining the symbol arrangement of FIG. 28, when the stop operation for the left reel 32L is performed so that the cherry winning is not missed, the maximum number of slips is 4, so the follow range. The third "white 7" symbol to the thirteenth "watermelon" symbol shown as can reach the lower stage of the left reel 32L.

For example, when the left stop button 42 is operated in the situation where the cherry winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 and the third "white 7" symbol has reached the lower stage of the left reel 32L, the third The third "white 7" symbol is in the situation where one of the "white 7" symbols to the sixth "replay" symbol reaches the lower stage of the left reel 32L and the cherry winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. When the left stop button 42 is operated while reaching the lower stage of the left reel 32L, the seventh "bell" symbol reaches the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Further, for example, when the left stop button 42 is operated in a situation where the cherry winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 and the ninth "cherry" symbol reaches the lower stage of the left reel 32L, 10 The ninth "cherry" symbol is on the left when any of the thirteenth "BAR" symbol to the thirteenth "watermelon" symbol reaches the lower stage of the left reel 32L and the cherry winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. When the left stop button 42 is operated while reaching the lower stage of the reel 32L, the ninth "cherry" symbol reaches the lower stage of the left reel 32L.

In the configuration in which the follow range is set as described above, the reel index sensor 36 corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R detects the sensor cut van 37, and the initial rotation position is the reel corresponding to the 15th symbol. It is a rotation position existing at the lower position of 32L, 32M, 32R. In the left reel 32L, this initial rotation position is the non-follow range (0th "watermelon" symbol ~ 2nd "bell" symbol and 14th "watermelon" symbol ~ which is a range other than the follow range and the follow range. Of the boundary with the 20th "bell" symbol), the rotation position is one symbol ahead of the boundary on the downstream side in the rotation direction of the left reel 32L.

As described above, when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, when the acceleration control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed according to the acceleration table shown in FIG. 22A, the acceleration is completed by the time the acceleration is completed. A one-pulse excitation signal is output 24 times. Further, each time a pulse of excitation signal is output, the stepping motor 33 of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R advances by one step, and the number of steps required to advance by one symbol is 24 steps. Therefore, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R advance by one symbol from the start to the completion of the acceleration control. In this case, the initial rotation position of the left reel 32L is a rotation position one symbol ahead of the boundary of the follow range and the non-follow range on the downstream side in the rotation direction of the left reel 32L. That is, the initial rotation position of the left reel 32L is the 15th "red" which is two symbols ahead of the 13th "watermelon" symbol existing at the downstream end of the left reel 32L in the rotation direction in the follow range. 7 ”This is the rotation position where the symbol exists at the lower position. As a result, when the left stop button 42 is operated with respect to the left reel 32L so that any of the symbols included in the follow range stops at the lower position of the left reel 32L, at the start of the next game. The sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 corresponding to the left reel 32L and the operation of the left stop button 42 is enabled at an early stage after the acceleration of the left reel 32L is completed and the rotation becomes constant speed. It will be. Then, when the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 after the acceleration is completed, the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is individually enabled, and the left reel is used. Since the initial rotation position of the 32L is set as described above, the operation of the left stop button 42 on the left reel 32L can be effectively enabled at an early stage in the situation where the stop operation on the left reel 32L is performed first. It will be possible.

Further explaining, when the rotation of the left reel 32L is started in the situation where the 14th "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L is stopped at the lower position, the reel index sensor 36 of the left reel 32L is the sensor cut van 37. Since the acceleration control of the left reel 32L is completed at the timing after the first detection, the left reel 32L further 1 detects the sensor cut van 37 by the reel index sensor 36 of the left reel 32L after the acceleration control is completed. It will be the timing of the lap. On the other hand, when the rotation of the left reel 32L is started in the situation where any of the symbols included in the follow range is stopped at the lower position of the left reel 32L, the acceleration control of the left reel 32L is performed. After the completion, the timing at which the reel index sensor 36 of the left reel 32L first detects the sensor cut van 37 occurs.

<Various game states>
Next, the corresponding processing at the end of the game executed in step S314 of the normal processing (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29. Since the process of step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13) is executed after the reel control process (step S313), all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in one game as the corresponding process at the end of the game. It will be executed after it is done.

First, a bonus process for performing transition control and progress control of the BB state ST2 (see FIG. 30), the RB state ST3 (see FIG. 30), or the RT state ST4 (see FIG. 30) is executed (step S1001). The bonus processing will be described in detail later. After that, on condition that it is neither the BB state ST2, the RB state ST3, or the RT state ST4 (step S1002: NO), the process jumps to the process corresponding to the current gaming state (step S1003). Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (see FIG. 30), the normal processing is executed (step S1004), and when the gaming state is the AT state ST5 (see FIG. 30), the AT is executed. (Step S1005), and when the game state is the end preparation state ST6 (see FIG. 30), the second control process of the game section is executed (step S1006). Further, the second control process (step S1006) of the game section is also executed when either the normal process of step S1004 or the AT process of step S1005 is executed. The processing contents of steps S1004 to S1006 will be described in detail later.

When the current gaming state is the BB state ST2, the RB state ST3, or the RT state ST4, a positive determination is made in step S1002, so that the normal processing in step S1004 and the AT processing in step S1005 are not executed. Therefore, in the case of the BB state ST2, the RB state ST3, or the RT state ST4, the process for advancing the normal game state ST1 and the process for advancing the AT state ST5 are not executed. On the other hand, even if the current game state is the BB state ST2, the RB state ST3, or the RT state ST4, the second control process of the game section in step S1006 is executed. Therefore, even in the case of the BB state ST2, the RB state ST3, or the RT state ST4, the process for advancing the second section SC2 is executed.

Next, the game state and the game section will be described. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state and a gaming section existing in the slot machine 10.

In the slot machine 10, there are a normal game state ST1, a BB state ST2, an RB state ST3, an RT state ST4, an AT state ST5, and an end preparation state ST6 as game states. These gaming states ST1 to ST6 do not overlap with each other.

The normal game state ST1 is a game state in which a part of the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S104) or a whole is cleared (step S105) to stay. Further, when the BB state ST2 or the RB state ST3 generated in the normal game state ST1 ends, or when the end preparation state ST6 ends, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. In the normal game state ST1, the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in one game") is less than zero.

The BB state ST2 is a gaming state in which the BB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and the BB winning state is established when the BB winning is established. Further, the RB state ST3 is a gaming state in which the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 and the RB winning state is established. In the BB state ST2 and the RB state ST3, the net increase expected value of the game medium in one game is higher than that in the non-AT state (from "the expected number of game media granted in one game" to "the number of game media bet in one game". Is a gaming state in which the value obtained by subtracting) becomes higher. Furthermore, the BBST2 state and the RB state ST3 are more than any of the game states other than the BB state ST2 and the RB state ST3. This is a gaming state in which "the value obtained by subtracting the" number of game media bet in one game ") becomes higher. Specifically, the winning combination that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is won with a higher probability (for example, about 1 / 1.1) than in other gaming states, and when the winning combination is won, each Since the first bell winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the game in one game. The expected net increase of the medium is 8 or more. The BB state ST2 and the RB state ST3 continue over a plurality of games, and end when the end condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution content of the game. The end condition is arbitrary, but in the case of the BB state ST2, it is set as the end condition that the total number of game media given since the start of the BB state ST2 is 350 or more, and the RB state ST3 If so, it is set as an end condition that the total number of game media given after the RB state is started is 150 or more.

The RT state ST4 is a gaming state that shifts after the BB state ST2 ends. The RT state ST4 is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay winning combination is higher than that of other gaming states by referring to the winning combination lottery table in the RT state shown in FIG. 17 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15). .. Further, when the replay combination is won, the replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Therefore, in the RT state ST4, the probability of establishing the replay winning is different. It is a gaming state that is higher than the gaming state of. Then, since the probability of winning the replay prize is set higher than that of other game states, the net increase expected value of the game medium in one game (“Expected number of game media granted in one game” is set to “Bet in one game”. The value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media") is greater than "0" and less than 1. The RT state ST4 is the first half RT state that ends when the game of the first half side end reference number (specifically, "20") is executed or the normal replay prize is established in the situation where the index value IV = 16 is won. And, in the first half RT state, the game shifts by the normal replay winning is established by the time the game of the first half end reference number is executed, and the game of the second half end reference number (specifically, "20") is executed. It has a latter half RT state that ends with. The RT state ST4 ends when the latter half RT state ends.

The AT state ST5 is a gaming state in which the transition to the AT state ST5 is satisfied when the transition condition to the AT state ST5 is satisfied in the normal gaming state ST1. The AT state ST5 ends when the remaining number of continuous games and the remaining number of sets in the AT state ST5 becomes "0", and ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. When the AT state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, the state shifts to the end preparation state ST6. Further, when the AT state ST5 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, the state shifts to the normal game state ST1. In the AT state ST5, when any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified. Further, in the AT state ST5, when any of the index values IV = 7 to 9 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second bell winning is notified. When the first bell prize or the second bell prize is established, the game medium of "15" is given. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media in one game in the AT state ST5. In the AT state ST5, the expected net increase in game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in one game") is 1 or more. Become. Furthermore, in the situation of the AT state ST5, the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game is 5 or more.

The end preparation state ST6 is a gaming state that shifts when the AT state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later. The end preparation state ST6 ends when one game is executed. When the end preparation state ST6 ends, it shifts to the normal game state ST1. The end preparation state ST6 is a game state in which the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in one game") is less than 0. Is.

In the configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST6 exist as described above, a game section is set separately from these game states ST1 to ST6. A first section SC1 and a second section SC2 are set as game sections. That is, in this slot machine 10, as elements that determine the game situation, there are set values of "1" to "6", various game states ST1 to ST6, and game sections of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2. doing.

The first section SC1 is a reel 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the player to establish a winning prize that is advantageous to the player when the winning combination to be established is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. By notifying the stop order of, the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in one game") is 1 or more. This is a section in which the advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5) that can be possible is not started, and the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state does not continue. When a partial clear process (step S104) or a complete clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the normal game state ST1 is set and the first section SC1 is set. Further, when the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed in the second section SC2, it also becomes the first section SC1. The second section SC2 is a section in which the advantageous gaming state can be started and the section in which the advantageous gaming state can be continued. Therefore, the second section SC2 is more advantageous than the first section SC1. Therefore, the player expects to shift to the second section SC2 in the first section SC1.

The first section SC1 ends when a transition to the second section SC2 occurs, and shifts to the second section SC2. On the other hand, the second section SC2 ends when the AT state ST5 or the end preparation state ST6 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1. When the second section SC2 is completed, the process shifts to the first section SC1. Further, as an end condition of the second section SC2, the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2 without the transition to the first section SC1 occurs is the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games). ), And by continuing the second section SC2 without the transition to the first section SC1, the limited total net increase of the game medium becomes the upper limit net increase (specifically, 2400). An ending condition is set that one of the conditions for reaching is satisfied. The limited total net increase in the number of game media is "the total number of game media granted by the game executed in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (in the situation where the game medium is not granted," 0. ")" To "the total number of game media digested to execute the game in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (" 0 "in the situation where the game is not executed)" is subtracted. In the case of a difference number of sheets, it is the number of sheets increased by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value with the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets as a predetermined reference value.

That is, when the limited total net increase number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase number by continuing the second section SC2, the second section SC2 ends and the second section SC2 ends. Shift to 1 section SC1. Further, when the second section SC2 is continued and the number of games executed from the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1. Transition. Then, when any one of these ending conditions is satisfied, the AT state ST5 is terminated and the second section SC2 is terminated in the game in which the ending condition is satisfied even in the middle of the AT state ST5. It shifts to the situation where it is the first section SC1 and is in the normal game state ST1. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing excessively.

As shown in FIG. 30, the normal game state ST1, the BB state ST2, the RB state ST3, and the RT state ST4 may stay in any of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2. On the other hand, the AT state ST5 and the end preparation state ST6 do not stay in the first section SC1 but only in the second section SC2.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a bonus process executed by the main MPU 72. The bonus process is executed in step S1001 in the corresponding process (FIG. 29) at the end of the game. Since the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 29) is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game as described above, the bonus processing is also executed in one game, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It will be executed after all the rotations of are stopped.

If it is not the RT state ST4 (step S1101: NO) and is neither the BB state ST2 nor the RB state ST3 (step S1103: NO), on condition that the BB winning is established (step S1104: YES). BB generation processing is executed (step S1105). In the BB generation process, "350", which is the end reference number of the BB state ST2, is set in the bonus counter provided in the main RAM 74. Further, "1" is set in the BB flag provided in the main RAM 74, and "0" is cleared in the first half RT flag and the second half RT flag provided in the main RAM 74. When "1" is set in the BB flag, the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) reads the winning combination lottery table in the bonus state from the main ROM 73 and executes the winning combination lottery. When the winning combination lottery table in the bonus state is referred to, the winning combination that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is won with a probability of about 1 / 1.1. Then, when the winning combination is won, the first bell prize is won regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. To establish. Further, when "1" is set in the BB flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S1103. Further, in the BB generation process, a BB generation command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. When the production side MPU 92 receives the BB generation command, it reads the data table corresponding to the BB state ST2 from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94, and controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61 and the sound output control of the speaker 62 according to the read data table. And the display control of the image display device 63 is executed.

If it is not the RT state ST4 (step S1101: NO) and is neither the BB state ST2 nor the RT state ST4 (step S1103: NO), on condition that the RB winning is established (step S1106: YES). RB generation processing is executed (step S1107). In the RB generation process, "150", which is the end reference number of the RB state ST3, is set in the bonus counter provided in the main RAM 74. Further, "1" is set in the RB flag provided in the main RAM 74, and "0" is cleared in the first half RT flag and the second half RT flag provided in the main RAM 74. When "1" is set in the RB flag, the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) reads the winning combination lottery table in the bonus state from the main ROM 73 and executes the winning combination lottery. When the winning combination lottery table in the bonus state is referred to, the winning combination that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is won with a probability of about 1 / 1.1. Then, when the winning combination is won, the first bell prize is won regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. To establish. If "1" is set in the RB flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S1103. Further, in the RB generation process, the RB generation command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. When the production side MPU 92 receives the RB generation command, it reads the data table corresponding to the RB state ST3 from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94, and controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61 and the sound output control of the speaker 62 according to the read data table. And the display control of the image display device 63 is executed.

When "1" is set in the BB flag or RB flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1103: YES), it means that the game this time is a game digested in the BB state ST2 or the RB state ST3. In this case, it is determined whether or not the game medium has been added in this game (step S1108). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first bell prize has been established. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1108, the number of game media to be granted this time is subtracted from the value of the bonus counter of the main RAM 74. In the BB state ST2 or the RB state ST3, only the first bell prize is generated as a prize for which the game medium is given, and when the first bell prize is generated, the game medium of "15" is given. In step S1109, "15" is subtracted from the value of the bonus counter of the main RAM 74.

When the value of the bonus counter after subtraction is "0" (step S1110: YES), the RT state is set on condition that "1" is set in the BB flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1111: YES). The setting process is executed (step S1112). In the RT state setting process, "1" is set in the first half RT flag provided in the main RAM 74, and "20", which is the first half end reference number, is set in the RT counter provided in the main RAM 74. The first half RT flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the first half RT state is in the RT state ST4, and the RT counter specifies the end trigger of the first half RT state and the second half RT state by the main MPU 72. It is a counter to do.

When a negative determination is made in step S1111 or the process of step S1112 is executed, the bonus end process is executed (step S1113). In the bonus end process, the BB flag and the RB flag are cleared to "0". Further, in the bonus end process, a bonus end command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. When the production side MPU 92 receives the bonus end command, the production side ROM 93 reads the data table corresponding to the bonus ending indicating that the BB state ST2 or the RB state ST3 has ended from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94, and the upper part is according to the read data table. The light emission control of the lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display control of the image display device 63 are executed. In addition, information indicating which of the BB state ST2 and the RB state ST3 has ended is set in the bonus end command. When the information indicating that the BB state ST2 has ended is set in the bonus end command, the data table corresponding to the RT state ST4 is displayed from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 after the effect corresponding to the bonus ending is completed. The light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display control of the image display device 63 are executed according to the read data table. On the other hand, when the information indicating that the RB state ST3 has ended is set in the bonus end command, the data corresponding to the game state before the transition to the RB state ST3 after the effect corresponding to the bonus ending is completed. The table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display control of the image display device 63 are executed according to the read data table.

In the RT state ST4, specifically, when "1" is set in the first half RT flag or the second half RT flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1101: YES), the RT processing is executed (step S1102). FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the RT processing.

When "1" is set in the first half RT flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1201: YES), it is determined whether or not the index value IV = 16 is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 15) (step S1201: YES). Step S1202). As already described, the index value IV = 16 is set with the normal replay winning data and the special replay winning data. When the index value IV = 16 is won, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are performed. Regardless of the timing, the normal replay prize is definitely established. On the other hand, when the first stop is either the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, a special replay prize can be established regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped second and the third stop. However, the special replay prize cannot be established depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L. If the left stop button 42 is operated at an operation timing in which the special replay prize is not established, the normal replay prize is surely established. That is, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 16 and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, the establishment of the special replay winning is prioritized, and the operation timing of the left stop button 42 and If the special replay prize cannot be established due to the above, the normal replay prize is definitely established.

When the index value IV = 16 is won (step S1202: YES), it is determined whether or not the normal replay winning is established (step S1203). If the index value IV = 16 is not won (step S1202: NO), or if the index value IV = 16 is won but the special replay prize is established instead of the normal replay prize (step S1203: NO), the main RAM 74 The value of the RT counter of is subtracted by 1 (step S1204). As a result, the number of continuous games remaining in the first half RT state is reduced by one. Then, when the value of the RT counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1205: YES), the first half RT flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1208). In this case, since "1" is not set in the latter half RT flag provided in the main RAM 74, the RT state ST4 ends only in the first half RT state without shifting to the latter half RT state.

On the other hand, when the index value IV = 16 is won and the normal replay winning is established (step S1202 and step S1203: YES), "1" is set in the latter half RT flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step). S1206). The latter half RT flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the latter half RT state is in the RT state ST4. After that, the RT counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "20", which is the reference number for ending the second half (step S1207), and the first half RT flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1208).

The trigger for clearing the first half RT flag to "0" is when 20 games, which are the reference number of games for the first half end, are exhausted without the transition to the second half RT state, and the transition to the second half RT state occurs. The first half RT flag is cleared to "0" not only when the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. That is, even if the BB combination or the RB combination is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the middle of the first half RT state, the first half RT state ends.

When "1" is set in the latter half RT flag, it means that the latter half RT state is in the RT state ST4. Therefore, a negative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, the value of the RT counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the RT counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1210: YES), the latter half RT flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1211).

The trigger for clearing the latter half RT flag to "0" is not only when 20 games, which are the reference number of games for the latter half, are exhausted, but also when the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. Also, the latter half RT flag is cleared to "0". That is, even if the BB combination or the RB combination is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the middle of the latter half RT state, the latter half RT state ends.

As described above, in the RT state ST4, the first half RT state is first started. If the index value IV = 16 is won in the first half RT state and the normal replay winning is established, the process shifts to the second half RT state. The second half RT state ends when 20 games, which are the second half end reference number of games, are exhausted unless the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored. On the other hand, if the index value IV = 16 is won in the first half RT state and 20 games, which are the first half end standard number of games, are digested without the event that the normal replay prize is established, the first half RT state is changed. The RT state ST4 ends without the transition to the latter half RT state occurring as a result of the termination. Therefore, in the first half RT state, the stay game in the RT state ST4 is achieved by winning the index value IV = 16 and establishing the normal replay prize when the game is digested as much as possible within the range of the game of the first half end reference number. It is possible to secure a large number.

In this case, if the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 16 as described above, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R and each of them. Regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the normal replay winning is surely established. On the other hand, when the first stop is either the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, a special replay prize can be established regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped second and the third stop. However, the special replay prize cannot be established depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L. If the left stop button 42 is operated at an operation timing in which the special replay prize is not established, the normal replay prize is surely established. That is, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 16 and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, the establishment of the special replay winning is prioritized, and the operation timing of the left stop button 42 and If the special replay prize cannot be established due to the above, the normal replay prize is definitely established. Therefore, if the index value IV = 16 is won at an early timing in the first half RT state, the first half RT state is continued by operating each stop button 42 to 44 so as to establish a special replay prize, and the first half RT state is set. When the index value IV = 16 is won at the stage when the number of games of the remaining first half end reference number is reduced, it is preferable to operate each stop button 42 to 44 so as to establish a normal replay prize. Under such circumstances, in the slot machine 10, when the index value IV = 16 is won in the first half RT state, that fact is notified before the timing when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped. .. In addition, if the remaining first half end reference number of games in the first half RT state is in the avoidance game number range (specifically, 8 to 20 games), a special replay prize is established when the index value IV = 16 is won. When the notification of the stop order is executed and the remaining first half end reference number of games in the first half RT state is within the established game number range (specifically, 7 games or less), the index value IV = 16 is won. The notification of the stop order for prompting the establishment of the normal replay prize is executed.

The control for executing the notification of the stop order as described above is executed in the stop order notification control process (step S512) of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the main MPU 72. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the stop order notification control process.

When "1" is set in the first half RT flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1301: YES) and the index value IV = 16 is won (step S1302: YES), the RT counter of the main RAM 74 It is determined whether or not the value is 8 or more (step S1303). When the value of the RT counter is in the avoidance game number range (specifically, 8 games to 20 games) (step S1303: YES), the stop order setting process for reverse push notification is executed (step S1304). As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary is started on the combined display unit 66. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. It will be terminated. After that, the reverse push notification command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1305). When the production side MPU 92 receives the reverse push notification command, the image display device 63 starts the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. It will be terminated.

34 (a) to 34 (c) show the reels 32L, 32M, 32M, when the reverse push notification as described above is executed and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped according to the reverse push notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stop mode of 32R. When the player who has confirmed the reverse push notification first stops the right reel 32R and second stops the middle reel 32M, the stop mode is as shown in FIG. 34 (a). In this case, the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R on the third main line ML3 are “replay” symbols. The stop mode is a stop mode in which both a normal replay prize and a special replay prize can be established.

In the situation shown in FIG. 34 (a), when the left stop button 42 is operated at the timing when the sixth "replay" symbol exists in the lower stage of the left reel 32L when the left reel 32L is stopped, FIG. 34 As shown in (b), the stop control of the left reel 32L is executed in a manner in which a special replay winning is established on the third main line ML3. As a result, a special replay prize is established. By establishing the special replay prize, the transition to the second half RT state is avoided, and the first half RT state is continued. On the other hand, when the left reel 32L is stopped in the situation shown in FIG. 34 (a), the left stop button 42 is operated at the timing when a symbol other than the sixth "replay" symbol exists in the lower stage of the left reel 32L. In this case, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), the stop control of the left reel 32L is executed in such a manner that the normal replay winning is established on the third main line ML3. As a result, the normal replay prize is established and the latter half RT state is entered.

Returning to the explanation of the stop order notification control process (FIG. 33), when the value of the RT counter is within the range of the number of established games (specifically, 7 games or less) (step S1303: NO), the stop order setting for forward push notification is set. The process is executed (step S1306). As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary is started on the combined display unit 66. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. It will be terminated. After that, the forward push notification command is transmitted to the effecting side MPU 92 (step S1307). When the production side MPU 92 receives the forward push notification command, the image display device 63 starts the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. It will be terminated. When the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped according to the forward push notification, they are normally placed on the third main line ML3 as shown in FIG. 34 (c) regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed in a mode in which the replay winning is established. As a result, the normal replay prize is established and the latter half RT state is entered.

When a negative determination is made in step S1301, a negative determination is made in step S1302, the process of step S1305 is executed, or the process of step S1307 is executed, another stop order notification process is executed (step). S1308). In the other stop order notification process, for example, when the AT state is ST5 and the index value IV = 1 to 6 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), the first bell is won. The display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be established is displayed on the combined display unit 66, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the first bell winning are stopped. A command is transmitted to the effecting side MPU 92 so that the order is notified by the image display device 63. Further, for example, in the case of the AT state ST5, if any of the index values IV = 7 to 9 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), the reel 32L that enables the establishment of the second bell winning. , 32M, 32R so that the display corresponding to the stop order is performed on the combined display unit 66, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which enables the establishment of the second bell winning is displayed on the image display device 63. A command for being notified is transmitted to the production side MPU 92.

In the first half RT state of RT state ST4, if the index value IV = 16 is won as described above, if the normal replay prize is established, the transition to the second half RT state occurs, while the index value IV = 16 is won. In the case where the special replay prize is established, the transition to the latter half RT state is avoided. In any of the main lines ML1 to ML5, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol and the middle reel 32M. If the stop symbol is a "replay" symbol and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, a special replay prize is awarded. Further, in order to establish the special replay prize, it is necessary to stop the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R as the first stop, and the left stop button 42 is operated at a predetermined timing with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L. There is a need. Therefore, when the special replay prize is established, the player recognizes that the replay prize is actually established but the so-called replay is removed. In this case, when the special replay prize is established, the execution mode of the predetermined notification is the same as the execution mode when the replay prize is not established. The execution mode of the predetermined notification will be described below.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a setting process at the end of the game executed by the main MPU 72. The setting process at the end of the game is executed in step S319 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The process of step S319 is a process executed when one game ends.

If any of the replay prizes is established in this game (step S1401: YES), the current game state is the first half RT state and the special replay prize is established in this game (step S1402). And step S1403: YES), the lighting process of the credit insertion button 47 is executed (step S1404). As a result, the credit insertion button 47 changes from the off state to the on state. However, since the special replay winning is established, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is maintained at "3", which is the upper limit number of bets, even if the current game ends. Therefore, even if the credit insertion button 47 is lit, it is not possible to place a bet on a new game medium.

After that, "1" is set in the pseudo-bet correspondence flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1405). The pseudo-bet-corresponding flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify the situation after the special replay winning is established in the first half RT state. Further, the bet extinguishing command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1406). When the production side MPU 92 receives the bet extinguishing command, the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 are turned off.

When a negative determination is made in step S1402, a negative determination is made in step S1403, or the process of step S1406 is executed, "1" is set in the bet set flag at the time of replay of the main RAM 74 (step S1407). ). That is, when any of the replay winnings is established, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is maintained as it is, and "1" is set in the bet set flag at the time of replay. As a result, when any of the replay prizes is established, it is possible to start a new game without the need for a new bet on the game medium.

If none of the replay prizes are established in this game (step S1401: NO), the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" (step S1408). The bet number setting counter 74a is a counter for specifying the current bet number on the main side MPU 72, and the main side bet display unit 64 displays the value corresponding to the value of the bet number setting counter 74a. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a control process of the bet display unit. The control process of the bet display unit is executed in step S212 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

When the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "0" (step S1501: YES), the all extinguishing process is executed (step S1502). By executing the all extinguishing process, all three light emitting units 64a to 64c arranged side by side in the vertical direction on the bet display unit 64 are turned off.

When the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "1" (step S1503: YES), the first lighting process is executed (step S1504). When the first lighting process is executed, the lowermost light emitting unit 64a of the three light emitting units 64a to 64c arranged side by side in the vertical direction on the bed display unit 64 becomes a lighting state, and the remaining light emitting units 64b and 64c. Turns off.

When the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "2" (step S1505: YES), the second lighting process is executed (step S1506). When the second lighting process is executed, the light emitting parts 64a and 64b at the bottom and the center of the three light emitting parts 64a to 64c arranged side by side in the vertical direction on the bet display unit 64 are turned on. The upper light emitting unit 64c is turned off.

When the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "3" (step S1505: NO), the third lighting process is executed (step S1507). When the third lighting process is executed, all of the three light emitting units 64a to 64c arranged side by side in the vertical direction on the bet display unit 64 are turned on.

If any of the replay prizes is established as described above, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is maintained even if the special replay prize is established in the first half RT state. Therefore, in the bet display unit 64, the state in which all three light emitting units 64a to 64c are lit is maintained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when any of the replay prizes is established, all the light emitting units 64a to 64c of the bet display unit 64 are temporarily turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). Later, all the light emitting units 64a to 64c may be set to the light emitting state again regardless of the operation by the player.

Returning to the description of the setting process (FIG. 35) at the end of the game, after executing the process of step S1408, a bet extinguishing command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1409). When the production side MPU 92 receives the bet extinguishing command, the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 are turned off. As a result, in the game in which the replay winning is not established, not only all the light emitting units 64a to 64c of the main side bet display unit 64 are turned off when the game ends, but also all the production side bet display units 69 are turned off. The light emitting units 69a to 69c are turned off.

After that, on condition that the value of the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1410: YES), the lighting process of the credit insertion button 47 is executed (step S1411). As a result, the credit insertion button 47 changes from the off state to the lit state, and the player is notified that the virtual medal can be bet.

Next, the pseudo-bet handling process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. The pseudo-bet handling process is executed in step S421 of the start waiting process (FIG. 14).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the pseudo-bet correspondence flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1601). As already explained, the pseudo-bet support flag is set to "1" when the special replay prize is established in the first half RT state. When "1" is set in the pseudo-bet support flag (step S1601: YES), the pseudo-bet support command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 on condition that the credit insertion button 47 is operated (step S1602: YES). (Step S1603). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the pseudo bet corresponding command, each light emitting unit 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 is set to the light emitting state, and the corresponding sound is output from the speaker 62.

After that, the pseudo-bet correspondence flag is cleared to "0" (step S1604). In addition, the credit insertion button 47 is turned off (step S1605). As a result, the credit insertion button 47 changes from the lit state to the extinguished state.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a bet notification control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. The bet notification control process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds).

First, it is determined whether or not a bet setting command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1701). The bet setting command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the value of the bet number setting counter 74a increases based on the medal being inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 or the credit insertion button 47 being operated as described above. .. The bet setting command includes information corresponding to the value of the bet number setting counter 74a after the bet number is increased.

When the bet setting command is received (step S1701: YES), the step emission data reading process at the time of bet setting is executed (step S1702). In the reading process, of the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69, all the light emitting units 69a to 69c corresponding to the value of the bet number setting counter 74a included in the bet setting command received this time are turned on. The light emission data is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 as described above. In this case, the light emitting units 69a to 69c that are already lit are maintained in the lit state, and the light emitting data for making the light emitting units 69a to 69c corresponding to the newly increased number of bets change from the off state to the lit state. Is read. Further, when the number of bets of 2 or more increases, the light emitting data for sequentially illuminating the light emitting units 69a to 69c corresponding to the small number of bets at predetermined intervals (for example, 1 second). Is read. The effect-side MPU 92 performs light-emitting control corresponding to the light-emitting data in the light-emitting control process on each of the light-emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect-side bed display unit 69.

The effect side RAM 94 is provided with a lit counter that is referred to by the effect side MPU 92 for identifying the types of light emitting units 69a to 69c that are already lit. When the value of the lit counter is "0", it corresponds to the fact that all the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 are in the off state, and the value of the lit counter is "1". In this case, only the light emitting unit 69a of the effect side bet display unit 69 is in the lit state, and when the value of the lit counter is "2", the light emitting unit 69a of the effect side bet display unit 69 And, it corresponds to the fact that only the light emitting unit 69b is in the lit state, and when the value of the lit counter is "3", all the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 are in the lit state. It corresponds to. When any of the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 is lit, the value of the lit counter is updated accordingly.

After that, the reading process of the sound output data at the time of setting the bet is executed (step S1703). In the read process, the sound output data is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 so that the bet sound corresponding to the increased number of bets is output from the speaker 62. The production side MPU 92 performs sound output control corresponding to the sound output data to the speaker 62 in the sound output control processing.

In the bet notification control process, it is determined whether or not a settlement command or a bet extinguishing command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1704). The settlement command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the settlement process is executed as described above. As described above, the bet extinguishing command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 at the end of the game in which the replay winning is not established, and is transmitted from the main MPU 72 at the end of the game in which the special replay winning is established in the first half RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1704, the bet light emitting unit is turned off (step S1705). In the extinguishing process, all the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 are turned off. In addition, the value of the lit counter of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0".

In the bet notification control process, it is determined whether or not a pseudo bet corresponding command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1706). As described above, the pseudo-bet correspondence command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the credit insertion button 47 is operated after the game in which the special replay winning is established in the first half RT state is completed.

When the pseudo bet correspondence command is received (step S1706: YES), the stepwise emission data reading process at the time of betting setting is executed (step S1707). In the reading process, light emission data for switching all the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 from the off state to the on state is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94. In this case, the light emitting data for turning on the lighting state is read out sequentially from the light emitting units 69a to 69c corresponding to the small number of bets at predetermined intervals (for example, 1 second). The effect-side MPU 92 performs light-emitting control corresponding to the light-emitting data in the light-emitting control process on each of the light-emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect-side bed display unit 69. Further, "3" is set in the lit counter of the effect side RAM 94. After that, the reading process of the sound output data at the time of setting the bet is executed (step S1708). In the read process, the sound output data is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 so that the bet sound corresponding to the increase in the number of bets by "3" is output from the speaker 62. The production side MPU 92 performs sound output control corresponding to the sound output data to the speaker 62 in the sound output control processing.

In the bet notification control process, it is determined whether or not a game start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1709). The game start command is transmitted in step S513 of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) when a new game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41. When the game start command is received (step S1709: YES), all the light emission of the production side bet display unit 69 is determined by determining whether or not the value of the lit counter of the production side RAM 94 is "3". It is determined whether or not the units 69a to 69c are already lit (step S1710). As described above, the game is started on the condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is the upper limit number of bets, so basically the value of the lit counter of the production side RAM 94 is "3". In a certain situation, a game start command is received from the main MPU 72. However, if the start lever 41 is operated without operating the credit insertion button 47 after the special replay winning is established in the first half RT state, the value of the lit counter of the effect side RAM 94 is not "3". The game start command is received from the main MPU 72 in the situation of "0". In this case, a negative determination is made in step S1710, and the process of reading the simultaneous emission data of the bet light emitting unit is executed (step S1711).

In the reading process, simultaneous light emission data for switching all the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 from the off state to the lit state is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94. In this case, all the light emitting units 69a to 69c are turned on at the same time, instead of being turned on in order from the light emitting units 69a to 69c corresponding to a small number of bets at predetermined intervals (for example, 1 second). Read out the light emission data to do so. The effect-side MPU 92 performs light-emitting control corresponding to the light-emitting data in the light-emitting control process on each of the light-emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect-side bed display unit 69. Further, "3" is set in the lit counter of the effect side RAM 94. If a negative determination is made in step S1710, the sound output data reading process at the time of betting setting is not executed. Therefore, when all the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 are turned on at the same time, the sound output of the corresponding bet sound is not performed.

Next, a state in which the bet notification is performed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 39. 39 (a) shows the period during which one game is executed, FIG. 39 (b) shows the timing when the credit insertion button 47 is operated, and FIG. 39 (c) shows the timing when the start lever 41 is operated. 39 (d) shows the states of the light emitting units 64a to 64c of the main side bet display unit 64, and FIG. 39 (e) shows the states of the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69. FIG. 39 (f) shows the output timing of the bet sound, FIG. 39 (g) shows the timing when the normal replay winning is established, and FIG. 39 (h) shows the timing when the special replay winning is established.

When the credit insertion button 47 is operated at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 39 (b), the light emitting units 64a to 64c of the main bet display unit 64 are operated as light emitting units 64a as shown in FIG. 39 (d). → The light emitting unit 64b → the light emitting unit 64c are sequentially switched from the off state to the lit state, and as shown in FIG. 39 (e), each light emitting unit 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 is the light emitting unit 69a → The light emitting unit 69b → the light emitting unit 69c are sequentially switched from the off state to the on state. Then, at the timing of t2, all the light emitting units 64a to 64c of the main side bet display unit 64 are turned on, and all the light emitting parts 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 are turned on. The lighting state of the main bet display unit 64 and the lighting state of the production side bet display unit 69 are maintained until the turn-off trigger occurs when the game ends. Further, the bet sound is output from the speaker 62 from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 39 (f). This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the number of bets has reached the upper limit of bets. When the number of bets reaches the upper limit of bets, the credit insertion button 47 switches from the lit state to the extinguished state.

After that, the start lever 41 is operated at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 39 (c), so that the game is started as shown in FIG. 39 (a). The game ends at the timing of t4. Neither replay prize is established in this game. Therefore, at the timing of t4 when the game ends, as shown in FIG. 39 (d), all the light emitting units 64a to 64c of the main bet display unit 64 are simultaneously turned off from the lit state, and at the same time, in FIG. 39 (e). As shown in the above, all the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 are simultaneously turned on and off. If the value of the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, the credit insertion button 47 switches from the off state to the lit state at the timing of t4.

After that, when the credit insertion button 47 is operated at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 39 (b), the light emitting units 64a to 64c of the main bet display unit 64 emit light as shown in FIG. 39 (d). In the order of unit 64a → light emitting unit 64b → light emitting unit 64c, the light emitting state is switched from the off state to the lighting state, and as shown in FIG. 39 (e), each light emitting unit 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 is the light emitting unit. The off state is switched to the on state in the order of 69a → light emitting unit 69b → light emitting unit 69c. Then, at the timing of t6, all the light emitting units 64a to 64c of the main side bet display unit 64 are turned on, and all the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 are turned on. Further, the bet sound is output from the speaker 62 from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 39 (f). This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the number of bets has reached the upper limit of bets. When the number of bets reaches the upper limit of bets, the credit insertion button 47 switches from the lit state to the extinguished state.

After that, the start lever 41 is operated at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 39 (c), so that the game is started as shown in FIG. 39 (a). The game ends at the timing of t8. In this game, as shown in FIG. 39 (g), a normal replay prize is established. When the normal replay winning is established, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is maintained, so that the next game can be started without making a new bet setting. Therefore, even if the current game ends, the lighting states of the light emitting units 64a to 64c of the main bet display unit 64 are maintained as shown in FIG. 39 (d), and as shown in FIG. 39 (e). The lighting state of each light emitting unit 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 is maintained. Further, the credit insertion button 47 is maintained in the off state.

After that, the start lever 41 is operated at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 39 (c), so that the game is started as shown in FIG. 39 (a). The game ends at the timing of t10. In this game, a special replay prize is established as shown in FIG. 39 (h). In addition, the current game state is the first half RT state. When the special replay winning is established in the first half RT state, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is maintained, so that the lighting state of the main bet display unit 64 is maintained as shown in FIG. 39 (d). However, as shown in FIG. 39 (e), all the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 are turned off. Further, the credit insertion button 47 switches from the off state to the on state regardless of whether or not the value of the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. If a special replay prize is established in a game state other than the first half RT state, the production side bet display unit 69 is maintained in the lit state and the credit insertion button 47 is maintained in the off state in the same manner as the main side bet display unit 64. Will be done.

After that, when the credit insertion button 47 is operated at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 39 (b), the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 emit light as shown in FIG. 39 (e). The lights are switched from the off state to the on state in the order of unit 69a → light emitting unit 69b → light emitting unit 69c. Then, at the timing of t12, all the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 are turned on. The main bet display unit 64 is maintained in a lit state. Further, the bet sound is output from the speaker 62 from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. 39 (f). Further, at the timing of t11, the credit insertion button 47 switches from the lit state to the extinguished state.

After that, the start lever 41 is operated at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 39 (c), so that the game is started as shown in FIG. 39 (a). The game ends at the timing of t14. In this game, a special replay prize is established as shown in FIG. 39 (h). In addition, the current game state is the first half RT state. When the special replay winning is established in the first half RT state, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is maintained, so that the lighting state of the main bet display unit 64 is maintained as shown in FIG. 39 (d). However, as shown in FIG. 39 (e), all the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 are turned off. Further, the credit insertion button 47 switches from the off state to the on state regardless of whether or not the value of the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more.

After that, at the timing of t15, the start lever 41 is operated as shown in FIG. 39 (c) without operating the credit insertion button 47 as shown in FIG. 39 (b). The game starts as shown in. At the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 39 (e), the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 are simultaneously switched from the off state to the on state. The main bet display unit 64 is maintained in a lit state. Further, as shown in FIG. 39 (f), the bet sound is not output this time. The game ends at the timing of t16. Neither replay prize is established in this game. Therefore, at the timing of t16 when the game ends, as shown in FIG. 39 (d), all the light emitting units 64a to 64c of the main bet display unit 64 are simultaneously turned off from the lit state, and at the same time, in FIG. 39 (e). As shown in the above, all the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 are simultaneously turned on and off. If the value of the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, the credit insertion button 47 switches from the off state to the lit state at the timing of t16.

As described above, when the special replay prize is established in the first half RT state, each light emitting unit 69a of the production side bet display unit 69 even in a situation where a new game can be started without setting a new bet. 69c goes from the lit state to the extinguished state. Then, when the credit insertion button 47 is operated, the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 are sequentially turned from the off state to the lit state even in a situation where a new bet setting is not made. .. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. It will be a special replay prize. Further, in order to establish the special replay prize, it is necessary to stop the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R as the first stop, and the left stop button 42 is operated at a predetermined timing with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L. There is a need. Therefore, when the special replay prize is established, the player recognizes that the replay prize is actually established but the so-called replay is removed. In this case, if the special replay prize is established as described above, the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 are temporarily switched from the lit state to the extinguished state, and then the credit insertion button 47 is operated. By configuring the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 to be sequentially switched from the off state to the on state, so-called replay removal is performed even in a situation where a replay prize is actually established. It is possible to make the player recognize the bed.

When the special replay prize is established in the first half RT state, not only the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 are turned off, but also the credit insertion button 47 is switched from the off state to the lighting state. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the so-called replay removal has been performed even in the situation where the replay winning is actually established.

When the special replay prize is established in the first half RT state and the credit insertion button 47 is operated after that, the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 are sequentially switched from the off state to the on state. Not only is it replaced, but a bet sound is output from the speaker 62. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the so-called replay removal has been performed even in the situation where the replay winning is actually established.

If the special replay prize is established in the first half RT state and the start lever 41 is operated without operating the credit insertion button 47, the production side bet display unit 69 is used when the game is started by the operation. All of the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the above are simultaneously switched from the off state to the on state. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the so-called replay removal has been performed even in the situation where the replay prize is actually established as described above, but when the game is started, the production side It is possible to make all the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the bet display unit 69 in the lit state.

In the configuration in which the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 are turned off when the special replay prize is established in the first half RT state, the light emitting units 64a to 64c of the main side bet display unit 64 are in the lighting state. Is maintained at. As a result, even if the situation is after the special replay prize is established in the first half RT state, the manager of the game hall can bet on the game medium by checking the main bet display unit 64. It is possible to clearly identify whether or not there is a bed.

<About the second section SC2>
Next, the second section SC2 will be described. First, the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. The first control process of the game section is executed in step S511, which is a process executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second section flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1801). The second section flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game section is the second section SC2, and when the second section flag is set to "1", the second section SC2 The case where the value of the second section flag is "0" is the first section SC1. When "1" is set in the second section flag (step S1801: YES), the processing after step S1802 is not executed. As a result, in the case of the second section SC2, the lottery process for the number of released games in step S1804 and the transition lottery process in step S1806 are not executed.

When "1" is not set in the second section flag (step S1801: NO), it is determined whether or not any index value IV has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 15) of this combination (step). S1802). If the lottery process (FIG. 15) for this combination is out of order (step S1802: NO), the processes of steps S1803 to S1809 are not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if the winning combination is lost in the lottery process (FIG. 15), the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S1803, the number of games to be released in step S1804. The lottery process and the lottery process of the transition mode in step S1806 are not executed. However, in the first section SC1, if the winning combination is lost in the lottery process (FIG. 15), the non-transition handling process is executed (step S1810). The non-migration support process will be described later.

When any index value IV is won in the lottery process (FIG. 15) of this combination (step S1802: YES), "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74, and the main RAM 74 Clear each of the continuous game number counter 74c (see FIG. 10) and the total acquisition number counter 74d (see FIG. 10) provided in the above (step S1803). When "1" is set in the second section flag, it becomes the second section SC2.

The continuous game number counter 74c is used by the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the game has been executed since the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1. It is a counter of. When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) in the second section SC2, the reached game is reached even during the AT state ST5. Then, the second section SC2 is terminated, and the situation shifts to the situation in which the first section SC1 is in the normal game state ST1.

The total acquisition number counter 74d sets the limited total net increase number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 to the main MPU 72 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1. It is a counter for identifying. As already explained, the limited total net increase in the number of game media is the total number of game media granted by the game executed in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (the grant of the game medium occurs). The total number of game media digested to execute the game in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued from "0" in the situation where the game is not executed (" 0" in the situation where the game is not executed). When the value obtained by subtracting "" is used as the predetermined difference number of sheets, the number of sheets increased by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value with the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets as the predetermined reference value. When the value of the total acquired number counter 74d reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400 sheets) in the second section SC2, even in the middle of the AT state ST5, the reached game is entered. Then, the second section SC2 is terminated, and the situation shifts to the situation in which the first section SC1 is in the normal game state ST1.

After that, the lottery process for the number of released games is executed (step S1804). The number of released games is a game required until the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs when the transition to the AT state ST5 is not won in the direct hit lottery process (step S2006) and the transition lottery process (step S2011) described later. It is a number. In the lottery process for the number of released games, first, the lottery table for the number of released games stored in advance in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. Then, the number of released games is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter with the lottery table of the number of released games. In this case, as the number of released games, any one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games and 800 games is selected. Moreover, the selection probability of each of these release games is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the probability that a large number of released games is selected is set high, and the probability that a small number of released games is selected is set high. It may be configured as such. After executing the lottery process for the number of released games, the number of released games selected in the lottery process for the number of released games is set in the number of released games counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1805). The release game number counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of release games on the main MPU 72.

After that, the lottery process of the transition mode is executed (step S1806). The transition mode is a mode for distinguishing the expected value that will be the transition winning to the AT state ST5 in the transition lottery process (step S2011) described later. Multiple types of transition modes are set. Specifically, the first transition mode, which has the lowest expected value for winning the transition to the AT state ST5, and the expected value for winning the transition to the AT state ST5 are intermediate. There are two transition modes and a third transition mode having the highest expected value for winning the transition to the AT state ST5. In the shift mode lottery process, first, the shift mode lottery table stored in advance in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. Then, the transition mode is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter with the lottery table in the transition mode. In this case, the selection probabilities of each transition mode are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the probability that the first transition mode is selected is set high, or the probability that the third transition mode is selected may be set high. .. After executing the lottery process of the transition mode, the information corresponding to the type of the transition mode selected in the lottery process is stored in the transition mode storage area provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1807).

After that, the lighting process of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S1808). In the lighting process of the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lit state. As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 is started by the section display unit 67. After that, the section transition command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1809). When the production side MPU 92 receives the section transition command, the production corresponding to the transition of the game section to the second section SC2 is started. Further, the section transition command includes information on the number of released games set in the release game number counter in step S1805, and information corresponding to the type of transition mode set in the transition mode storage area in step S1807. ing.

Next, the second control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second control process of the game section is executed in step S1006 in the corresponding process (FIG. 29) at the end of the game. As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped, the second control processing of the game section is also the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game. Is executed after all are stopped.

When "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S1901: YES), the current state of the flag of the main RAM 74 is confirmed. It is determined whether or not the game state is the end preparation state ST6 (step S1902). As already described, the end preparation state ST6 is a gaming state that shifts when the AT state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2.

When the end preparation state is ST6 (step S1902: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the end preparation completion flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1903). The end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST6. In the AT process (step S1005) in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29), a flag is set to set the end preparation state ST6 when the AT state ST5 ends, and the end preparation completion flag is set to "0". "Cleared.

If "1" is not set in the end preparation completion flag (step S1903: NO), after setting "1" in the end preparation completion flag (step S1904), the processes after step S1905 are executed. When "1" is set in the end preparation completion flag (step S1903: YES), it means that one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST6. In this case, the process for terminating the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed (step S1914). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the player stays in the AT state ST5, the counter for storing the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 and the counter for storing the remaining number of sets are stored. By clearing various data indicating that the AT state is ST5 including the above, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1. The second section SC2 is terminated by executing the initialization process of the second section SC2 even in the middle of the BB state ST2, the RB state ST3, and the RT state ST4, but the BB state ST2 and the RB state ST3 And the RT state ST4 is continued as it is without being terminated.

After that, the section display unit 67 is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state (step S1915). As a result, the notification that the section display unit 67 is the second section SC2 is completed. After that, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1916). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 makes the effect corresponding to the end of the second section SC2 executed.

When the end preparation state is not ST6 (step S1902: NO), or when the process of step S1904 is executed, the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S1905). As already explained, the continuous game number counter 74c sets the number of game executions from the start of the second section SC2 to the main MPU 72 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1. It is a counter for identifying.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous game number counter 74c after 1 addition is 1500 or more, which is the upper limit number of games (step S1906). When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is 1500 or more, it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1906, and a process for terminating the second section SC2 in steps S1914 to S1916 is executed. The processing contents of steps S1914 to S1916 have already been described. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and when the AT state ST5 is in the middle, the AT state ST5 is forcibly ended and becomes the normal game state ST1.

When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is less than 1500 (step S1906: NO), in this game, one of the first chance replay prize, the second chance replay prize, the normal replay prize, and the special replay prize is won. Is determined (step S1907). In this case, regardless of which of the normal game states ST1, BB state ST2, RB state ST3, RT state ST4, and AT state ST5, the game is subject to the determination in step S1907.

If none of the replay winnings is established (step S1907: NO), the number of bets in this game (that is, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total number of acquisition counters 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S1908). .. In this case, even if the replay winning is established in the previous game and the current game corresponds to the replay due to the establishment of the replay winning, the number of bets in this game (that is, the bet number setting counter 74a) Value) is subtracted from the total acquisition number counter 74d.

As already explained, the total acquisition number counter 74d determines the total net increase in the number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying by the main MPU 72. As already explained, the limited total net increase in the number of game media is the total number of game media granted by the game executed in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (the grant of the game medium occurs). The total number of game media digested to execute the game in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued from "0" in the situation where the game is not executed (" 0" in the situation where the game is not executed). When the value obtained by subtracting "" is used as the predetermined difference number of sheets, the number of sheets increased by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value with the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets as the predetermined reference value.

After that, one of the small winning combination prizes (1st to 9th supplementary prizes, 1st bell prize, 2nd bell prize, special bell prize, 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon) in which the game medium is given in this game It is determined whether or not the winning and the cherry winning) have been established (step S1909). In this case, regardless of which of the normal game states ST1, BB state ST2, RB state ST3, RT state ST4, and AT state ST5, the game is subject to the determination in step S1909. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1909, the number of game media given in this game is added to the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S1910).

When a negative determination is made in step S1909, or when the process of step S1910 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 is 0 or more (step S1911). When the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than 0 (step S1911: NO), the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" (step S1912).

As described above, since the number of bets for the current number of games is subtracted from the total number of acquisition counters 74d in step S1908, for example, any small winning combination is established in the game in the normal game state ST1 immediately after shifting to the second section SC2. If not, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d will be less than 0. In this case, by making a negative determination in step S1911, the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" in step S1912. As a result, from "the total number of game media granted by the game executed in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (" 0 "in the situation where the game medium is not granted)" to "the second section". When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media digested to execute the game in the situation where SC2 is continued (“0” in the situation where the game is not executed) ”is set as the predetermined difference number. With the minimum value of the predetermined difference number as the predetermined reference value, the limited total net increase number of game media, which is the number of the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, is measured by using the total acquisition number counter 74d. It becomes possible.

Whether or not the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number "2400" when the affirmative judgment is made in step S1907, the affirmative judgment is made in step S1911, or the process of step S1912 is executed. (Step S1913). When the value of the total acquired number counter 74d exceeds "2400", it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1913, and a process for terminating the second section SC2 in steps S1914 to S1916 is executed. The processing contents of steps S1914 to S1916 have already been described. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and when the AT state ST5 is in the middle, the AT state ST5 is forcibly ended and becomes the normal game state ST1.

Here, if any of the replay prizes is established, the process of steps S1908 to S1912 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S1907. In a game in which a replay prize is established, the game medium owned by the player is used when setting a bet at the start of the game, but the profit from the establishment of the replay prize is the same as the number of bets in the game in which the replay prize is established. It is possible to replay a new game based on the number of bets. That is, the number of game media owned by the player does not change in the game in which the replay prize is established. In this case, by not executing the processes of steps S1908 to S1912 in the game in which the replay winning is established, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d in the game in which the number of game media owned by the player does not change. It is possible to omit the execution of the process for changing the value, and it is possible to omit the unnecessary execution of the process.

On the other hand, even in the game in which the replay winning is established, in step S1913, it is determined whether or not the value of the total acquired number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number of "2400". As a result, in the game before the game in which the replay prize was established, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d has already exceeded the upper limit net increase of "2400", but the second cause is noise or the like. Even if the initialization process of the section SC2 is not executed, it is specified that the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number "2400" in the game in which the subsequent replay winning is established. This makes it possible to execute the initialization process of the second section SC2.

If a negative determination is made in step S1913, the ending correspondence process is executed (step S1917). The ending correspondence process will be described later.

<About normal game state ST1>
Next, the processing contents in the normal game state ST1 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an advantageous lottery process at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72. The advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), and is the first control process (step S511) and the stop order notification control process (step S512) of the game section. It is executed in step S510, which is a process executed before.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2001). As already explained, the second section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is the second section SC2 by the main MPU 72, and "1" may be set in the second section flag. The second section SC2, and the case where the value of the second section flag is "0" is the first section SC1. If "1" is not set in the second section flag (step S2001: NO), the processes after step S2002 are not executed. As a result, in the case of the first section SC1, the process for shifting the gaming state to the AT state ST5 is not executed.

If "1" is set in the second section flag (step S2001: YES) and the current game state is AT state ST5 (step S2002: YES), the AT state process at the start of the game is executed. (Step S2003). The processing for the AT state at the start of the game will be described later.

When "1" is set in the second section flag (step S2001: YES) and the gaming state is not the AT state ST5 (step S2002: NO), the second transition provided in the main RAM 74 is provided. It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the confirmation flag (step S2004). The second transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition to the AT state ST5 has already been won in the transition lottery process (step S2011) described later. If "1" is set in the second transition confirmation flag (step S2004: YES), the processes after step S2005 are not executed. As a result, in the situation where the transition to the AT state ST5 has already been confirmed, the process for shifting the gaming state to the AT state ST5 in step S2005 or later is not executed.

When "1" is not set in the second transition confirmation flag (step S2004: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning data corresponding to the direct hit is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S2005). The winning data for direct hits is the cherry winning data. That is, if any of the index values IV = 13, 18 and 20 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in this game, an affirmative determination is made in step S2007. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2007, the direct hit lottery process is executed (step S2006). In the direct hit lottery process, whether or not to shift to the AT state ST5 at the end of this game is determined by using the direct hit lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. It will be decided by lottery. The probability of winning a direct hit in the direct hit lottery process is arbitrary, but in this slot machine 10, there is a 25% probability of winning a direct hit.

When a direct hit is won in the direct hit lottery process (step S2007: YES), "1" is set in the first transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2008). The first transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the direct hit has been won. After that, a direct hit command is transmitted to the directing MPU 92 (step S2009). When the direct hit command is received, the effect side MPU 92 sets the execution mode of the effect on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to be the execution mode corresponding to the direct hit winning. By confirming the effect, the player can grasp that the state shifts to the AT state ST5 triggered by the direct hit winning.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2005 or a negative judgment is made in step S2007, the winning combination is won by any of the index values IV = 10 to 15, 18 to 21 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in this game. It is determined whether or not it is (step S2010). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2010, the transition lottery process is executed (step S2011).

In the shift lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the AT state ST5 by using the shift lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. In this case, the transition lottery table is provided with a one-to-one correspondence with the type of transition mode. That is, a first transition lottery table corresponding to the first transition mode, a second transition lottery table corresponding to the second transition mode, and a third transition lottery table corresponding to the third transition mode are provided. There is. When it is the first transition mode and the first transition lottery table is referred to, the expectation that the transition to the AT state ST5 is won in the transition lottery process (step S2011) is 20%. In the first transition lottery table, among the index values IV = 10 to 15, 18 to 21, the probability of winning the winning combination in the lottery process (FIG. 15) is lower. The index value IV has the probability of winning the transition to the AT state ST5. Is set to be high. When it is the second transition mode and the second transition lottery table is referred to, the expectation that the transition to the AT state ST5 is won in the transition lottery process (step S2011) is 40%. In the second transition lottery table, among the index values IV = 10 to 15, 18 to 21, the probability of winning the winning combination in the lottery process (FIG. 15) is lower. Is set to be high. When the third transition mode is used and the third transition lottery table is referred to, the expectation of winning the transition to the AT state ST5 in the transition lottery process (step S2011) is 60%. In the third transition lottery table, among the index values IV = 10 to 15, 18 to 21, the probability of winning the winning combination in the lottery process (FIG. 15) is lower. The index value IV has the probability of winning the transition to the AT state ST5. Is set to be high.

When the transition winning of the AT state ST5 is obtained in the transition lottery process (step S2012: YES), "1" is set in the second transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2013). The second transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition to the AT state ST5 has already been won in the transition lottery process (step S2011) as described above. Further, a value corresponding to the number of transition standby games (specifically, 5 games) is set in the transition standby counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2014). The transition standby counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of transition standby games (specifically, 5 games) has been consumed since the second transition confirmation flag was set to "1". By winning the transition in the transition lottery process (step S2011), not only the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1", but also the transition standby counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of transition standby games. Every time one game is digested in the situation where "1" is set in the second transition confirmation flag, the value of the transition standby counter is decremented by 1. Then, in the situation where "1" is set in the second transition confirmation flag, the value of the transition standby counter becomes "0", so that the gaming state shifts to the AT state ST5. Therefore, after the transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2011), the number of transition waiting games is exhausted, so that the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43. The normal processing is executed in step S1004 in the corresponding processing (FIG. 29) at the end of the game. As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped, the normal processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped. Will be executed later. As described above, in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29), if the BB state is ST2, the RB state is ST3, or the RT state is ST4, a positive determination is made in step S1002 to perform a normal process (step S1004). Is not executed.

When "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S2101: YES), "1" is set in the first transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S2102). If a direct hit is won in the direct hit lottery process (step S2006) executed at the start of this game, "1" is set in the first transition confirmation flag.

When "1" is set in the first transition confirmation flag (step S2102: YES), a process for shifting to the AT state ST5 is executed based on the fact that the direct hit is won. Specifically, first, "3" is set as the initial set count at the time of a direct hit in the set count counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2103). The set count counter is a counter for specifying the remaining set count in the AT state ST5 by the main MPU 72. When the number of continuous games remaining in the AT state ST5 becomes "0", one set of the AT state ST5 ends. In this case, if the value of the set count counter is 1 or more, a predetermined number of games is newly set as the remaining number of continuous games and a new set is started, and if the set count counter value is "0". The AT state ST5 ends.

After that, "100" is set as the initial number of games at the time of a direct hit in the AT continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2104). The AT continuation counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of remaining continuous games in one set during execution of the AT state ST5. After that, "1" is set in the AT state flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2105). The AT state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the AT state is ST5. After that, the AT transition command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2106). When the effecting side MPU 92 receives the AT transition command, the effecting mode in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is set to the execution mode corresponding to the AT state ST5. After that, "1" is set in the first output start flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2107). The first output start flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the external output corresponding to the start of the AT state ST5 should be executed. When the process of step S2107 is executed, the first transition confirmation flag is cleared to "0".

When "1" is not set in the first transition confirmation flag (step S2102: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2108). The second transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition has been won in the transition lottery process (step S2011) as described above.

When "1" is set in the second shift confirmation flag (step S2108: YES), the value of the shift standby counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2109). As already explained, the transition standby counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of transition standby games (specifically, 5 games) has been exhausted since the second transition confirmation flag was set to "1". Is. When the value of the transition standby counter after 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2110: YES), the process for transitioning to the AT state ST5 at the time of non-direct hit is executed. If "1" is not set in the second transition confirmation flag (step S2108: NO), the value of the release game counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2111), and the number of released games after the subtraction is 1. Even when the value of the counter is "0" (step S2112: YES), the process for shifting to the AT state ST5 is executed at the time of non-direct hit.

In the process for shifting to the AT state ST5 at the time of non-direct hit, first, the lottery process for the number of sets is executed (step S2113). In the set number lottery process, the set number of AT state ST5 is determined by lottery by using the set number lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. The number of sets to be selected by lottery is 1, 2, and 3 times, and in the case of the first transition mode, the expected value of the number of sets selected is 1.2 times, and in the case of the second transition mode. The expected value of the number of sets selected is 1.8 times, and the expected value of the number of sets selected in the third transition mode is 2.4 times. Then, the set number selected in the set number lottery process (step S2113) is set in the set number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2114).

After that, "50" is normally set as the initial number of games in the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2115). Further, "1" is set in the AT state flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2116). Further, the AT transition command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2117). When the effecting side MPU 92 receives the AT transition command, the effecting mode in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is set to the execution mode corresponding to the AT state ST5. After that, "1" is set in the first output start flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2118). When the process of step S2118 is executed, the second transition confirmation flag is cleared to "0".

<About AT state ST5>
Next, the processing content in the AT state ST5 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an AT state process at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72. The AT state process at the start of the game is executed in step S2003 in the advantageous lottery process (FIG. 42) at the start of the game.

First, by determining whether or not the value of the addition period counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the current state is the addition period in the AT state ST5 (step S2201). The additional period counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not it is an additional period and the number of continuous games remaining in the additional period. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process for the additional period is executed (step S2215). The processing for the additional period will be described later.

When the value of the addition period counter is "0" and not the addition period (step S2201: NO), any of the index values IV = 10 to 15, 18 to 21 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in this game. On condition that the crab has been won (step S2202: YES), the transition lottery process for the additional period is executed (step S2203). In the addition period transition lottery process, the remaining number of continuous games is added in the AT state ST5 by using the addition period transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. It is decided by lottery whether or not to shift to the additional period in which is likely to occur. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), has a higher probability of winning the transition of the additional period.

When the transition of the additional period is won (step S2204: YES), the addition process of the number of continuous games is executed (step S2205). In the process of adding the number of continuous games, the number of games equal to or greater than the number of continuous games for which the additional period will continue is added to the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74. Specifically, the addition period will continue for 10 games, but in step S2205, 20 games, which is the number of games of 10 games or more, is added to the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of continuous games remaining in the AT state ST5 from becoming "0" in the middle of the addition period. After that, the first addition command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2206). The first addition command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that an addition of the number of games has occurred at the time of transition to the addition period. In addition, the first addition command includes information on 20 games, which is the number of games to be added this time. When the production side MPU 92 receives the first addition command, the production indicating that the number of games has been added at the time of transition to the addition period is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. do. After that, "1" is set in the additional winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2207). The additional winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition winning of the additional period has been achieved in the transition lottery process (step S2203) of the additional period.

If the transition winning of the addition period is not achieved in the transition lottery process of the addition period (step S2203) (step S2204: NO), the winning combination is won in the lottery process of the role in this game (FIG. 15) with an index value IV = 10. It is determined whether or not it is (step S2208). As already described, the index value IV = 10 is set with the first bell winning data and the special bell winning data. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, the set number addition process is executed (step S2209). Specifically, "3" is added to the set count counter of the main RAM 74 as the set count when the rare combination is won. That is, when the index value IV = 10, which has the lowest winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), is won in the AT state ST5, the remaining number of sets in the AT state ST5 is surely increased, and the number of sets is surely increased. The number of increases is "3", which is the same as the number of initial sets at the time of direct hit. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV = 10, which has the lowest winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the AT state ST5.

After that, the second addition command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2210). The second addition command is a command for causing the effector MPU 92 to recognize that the remaining number of sets has been added. In addition, the second addition command includes information of "3", which is the number of sets to be added this time. When the effect side MPU 92 receives the second addition command, the effect indicating that the number of sets of "3" has been given is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

If a negative determination is made in step S2208, the first additional lottery process is executed (step S2211). In the first additional lottery process, the remaining number of sets of the AT state ST5 is increased by using the first additional lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. It is decided by lottery whether or not to generate the additional addition. The number of sets that can be selected in the first additional lottery process is either 0 times, 1 time, or 2 times. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), has a higher probability of selecting one or more sets, and has a higher expected value of the number of sets selected. It becomes.

When one or two sets are selected in the first additional lottery process (step S2212: YES), the set number selected in the first additional lottery process is added to the set count counter of the main RAM 74. (Step S2213). After that, the third addition command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2214). The third addition command is a command for causing the effector MPU 92 to recognize that the remaining number of sets has been added. In addition, the third addition command includes information on the number of sets to be added this time. When the production side MPU 92 receives the third addition command, the effect indicating that the number of sets to be added this time has been given is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. ..

Next, the AT processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The AT process is executed in step S1005 in the corresponding process (FIG. 29) at the end of the game. As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped, the AT processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped. Will be executed later.

First, the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2301). After that, by determining whether or not the value of the addition period counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the current state is the addition period (step S2302).

When the value of the addition period counter is "0" and not the addition period (step S2302: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the addition winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2303). At the start of this game, if the transition winning of the addition period is achieved in the transfer lottery process (step S2203) of the addition period, "1" is set in the addition winning flag.

When "1" is set in the addition winning flag (step S2303: YES), the addition period setting process is executed (step S2304). In the addition period setting process, a value corresponding to 10 games, which is the initial number of continuous games of the addition period, is set in the addition period counter of the main RAM 74. Then, after clearing the additional winning flag "0" (step S2305), the start command of the additional period is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2306). The start command of the addition period is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the addition period has been started. When the effecting side MPU 92 receives the command to start the addition period, the effect indicating that the addition period has started and the effect indicating that the addition period has started are executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. To do so.

After that, the freeze counter setting process is executed (step S2307). In the freeze counter setting process, the freeze period (specifically, 5 seconds) at the time of transition to the additional period is set in the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74. The freeze period set in the freeze counter is subtracted by the timer subtraction process in step S208 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is activated. When the value of the freeze counter is 1 or more, in step S317 of the normal process (FIG. 13), provided that "1" is not set in any of the ending flags provided in the main RAM 74. By making a negative determination, the user waits in step S317. The timing at which the process of step S317 is executed is the timing after the reel control process (step S313), the corresponding process at the end of the game (step S314), and the medium addition process (step S315) are executed. Therefore, when the transition setting to the addition period is made, basically, in the game in which the transition setting is made, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, and the game state transition process and the medium addition process are performed. A new game cannot be started until the freeze period of the transition to the additional period has elapsed after the completion. Then, since the effect indicating that the addition period is started in the freeze period of the transition to the addition period is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, the player is informed that the addition period is started. It becomes possible to recognize.

When the value of the addition period counter is 1 or more and it is the addition period (step S2302: YES), the value of the addition period counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2308). Then, when the value of the addition period counter after the subtraction of 1 becomes "0" (step S2309: YES), the end command of the addition period is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2310). The end command of the addition period is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the addition period has ended. When the effecting side MPU 92 receives the end command of the addition period, the effect indicating that the addition period has ended is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

When a negative determination is made in step S2303, when the process of step S2307 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S2309, or when the process of step S2310 is executed, the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is "0". It is determined whether or not it is (step S2311). When the value of the AT continuation counter is "0" (step S2311: YES), the value of the set count counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2312). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the set count counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2313).

When the value of the set count counter is 1 or more (step S2313: NO), the process for starting a new set in the AT state ST5 is executed. Specifically, first, "50" is set as the initial number of continuous games of a new set in the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2314). After that, the AT continuation command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2315). The AT continuation command is a command for causing the directing MPU 92 to recognize that a new set of the AT state ST5 has been started. When the effect side MPU 92 receives the AT continuation command, the effect indicating that a new set of the AT state ST5 has been started is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

After that, "1" is set in the second output start flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2316). The second output start flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the external output corresponding to the start of a new set of the AT state ST5 should be executed. Further, the AT signal OFF setting process is executed (step S2317), and the OFF continuation counter setting process is executed (step S2318). The processing of steps S2317 and S2318 will be described later.

When the value of the set count counter is "0" (step S2313: YES), the setting process of the end preparation state ST6 is executed (step S2319). In the setting process, "1" is set in the end preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74. The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is the end preparation state ST6, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST6. Further, the end preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2320). The end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST6 as described above.

In the end preparation state ST6, as already explained, when an affirmative judgment is made in step S1902 in the second control process (FIG. 41) of the game section and "1" is not set in the end preparation completion flag (step). S1903: NO), after setting the end preparation completion flag to "1", a process for specifying whether or not the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is executed, and the second control process of the game section in this game ( FIG. 41) ends. On the other hand, when "1" is set in the end preparation completion flag (step S1903: YES), the process for terminating the second section SC2 and shifting to the first section SC1 is executed (steps S1914 to S1916). ). As a result, the second section SC2 ends when the game following the game in which the AT state ST5 has ended ends.

After executing the process of step S2320 in the AT process (FIG. 45), the AT state flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2321). As a result, the AT state ST5 ends, and the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST1. Further, an AT end command indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2322). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, the effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. After that, "1" is set in the external output end flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2323). The external output end flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the state should be the external output state corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5 and the transition to the normal game state ST1.

<About the additional period>
Next, the additional period in the AT state ST5 will be described in more detail.

In the addition period, the addition period processing in step S2215 is executed by making an affirmative determination in step S2201 in the AT state processing (FIG. 44) at the start of the game. The details of the process for the addition period will be described later, but in each game, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to generate the addition of the number of sets of the AT state ST5, and if the game is won, the number of sets is added. Then, when the number of sets is added, the corresponding effect can be executed. In this case, a plurality of types of effect modes are set to determine the execution mode of the effect.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the effect mode during the addition period.

As shown in FIG. 46, the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are set as the effect modes during the addition period. In these first to third production modes, whether or not to notify the number of sets to be added when the number of sets is added and the number of sets to be added is not generated, and the number of sets is added in a situation where the freeze period during the addition period does not occur. It depends on whether or not the notification that makes the player recognizable that the winning is executed is executed.

That is, when the number of sets is added and won during the addition period, the number of sets to be added is one, two, or three times. In the configuration, when the additional winning of the set number is notified and the additional winning is notified, whether or not to notify the player up to the set number selected at that time is the first to third. It is different in the production mode.

When the notification indicating that the number of sets has been added is executed during the addition period, the speaker 62 outputs an addition-corresponding sound with a relatively loud sound in order to enhance the effect of the effect. In this case, if the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified and the additional corresponding voice is suddenly output, the player who is surprised at it makes a mistake in the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. There is a risk that it will end up. Therefore, if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are notified of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R during the addition period and the number of sets is added and the reels are won, a freeze period is basically generated by the control of the main MPU 72. During the mid-freeze period, the control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with respect to the operation of the player is blocked. Then, the additional corresponding voice is output during the freeze period during the process. As a result, even if the player is surprised at the additional voice, the control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with respect to the operation of the player is blocked at that timing, so that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be mistaken. The sex is reduced.

On the other hand, in a situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified, the number of sets may be added and the winning may be won. Even if the player is surprised by the output of the additional sound in such a situation, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is arbitrary, so the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be wrong. There is no. Therefore, there is no intermediate freeze period in this situation. Then, in the first to third production modes, it is different whether or not the notification that the number of sets has been added and the winning has been executed is executed in the situation.

The first production mode is a mode in which the number of sets to be added is notified when it is notified that the number of sets has been added and the number of sets has been won. This is a mode in which notification of winning is executed. The second production mode is a mode in which the number of sets to be added is not notified when it is notified that the number of sets has been added, and the number of sets is added even if the freeze period does not occur in the middle. This is the mode in which notification of winning is executed. The third production mode is a mode in which the number of sets to be added is notified when it is notified that the number of sets has been added and the number of sets has been added. This is a mode in which the notification of the occurrence is not executed.

When the transition to the additional period occurs, the freeze period at the time of the transition to the additional period basically occurs as described above. Since the freeze period at the time of shifting to the additional period occurs after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has stopped, a new game cannot be started until the freeze period at the time of shifting to the additional period has elapsed. Further, in the freeze period at the time of transition to the addition period, an effect indicating that the addition period is started is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. It is possible to start the first game in the addition period after the freeze period at the time of the transition to the addition period has elapsed. At this timing, the image display device 63 sets the effect mode in the addition period to the first to third effect modes. An image is displayed to determine which one to use.

47 (a) to 47 (d) are explanatory views for explaining an image display for determining which of the first to third effect modes is set as the effect mode. As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the mode determination image G1 includes a selection target mode image G2 indicating the type of effect mode to be selected and an effect mode to be selected in the selection target mode image G2. A switching period image G3 showing the remaining switching period until switching to the next type of effect mode, and an operation suggestion image G4 suggesting an operation for determining the type of effect mode are included.

The selection target mode image G2 corresponds to a first corresponding image called "mode 1" corresponding to the first effect mode, a second corresponding image called "mode 2" corresponding to the second effect mode, and a third effect mode. A third corresponding image called "mode 3" is displayed. Each of these corresponding images is displayed as if they are arranged in a ring. In addition, among these corresponding images, the type of effect mode corresponding to the corresponding image displayed in the foreground is selected, and the corresponding image displayed in the foreground is changed in a predetermined order each time the remaining switching period elapses. Will be done. Specifically, when the remaining switching period has elapsed in the situation where the first corresponding image is displayed in the foreground as shown in FIG. 47 (a), it is brought to the foreground as shown in FIG. 47 (b). The displayed image is changed to the second corresponding image. Then, when the remaining switching period elapses, the image displayed in the foreground is changed to the third compatible image, and when the remaining switching period elapses, the image displayed in the foreground is the first corresponding image. Return to image.

The switching period image G3 displays an image that allows the player to recognize the length of the remaining switching period. Specifically, the gauge display is performed on the switching period image G3, and the shorter the remaining switching period, the smaller the length dimension of the gauge display. The remaining switching period is set to 3 seconds, but it is arbitrary.

In the operation suggestion image G4, a character image indicating that the operation for determining the type of the effect mode is the operation of the start lever 41 is displayed. When the start lever 41 is operated to trigger the start of the game, the type of production mode corresponding to the corresponding image displayed in the foreground in the selection target mode image G2 is selected in this addition period at that timing. There are several types of production modes. For example, when the start lever 41 is operated in the situation shown in FIG. 47 (a) to trigger the start of the game, the effect mode generated in this addition period becomes the first effect mode, for example, in FIG. 47 (b). When the start lever 41 is operated in the indicated situation to trigger the start of the game, the effect mode generated in the current addition period is the second effect mode.

Here, at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated as described above and the game start trigger occurs, the type of production mode corresponding to the corresponding image displayed in the foreground in the selection target mode image G2 is added during this addition period. In the configuration in which the effect mode is the type of effect that occurs, the type of effect corresponding to the corresponding image to be selected at that timing is set by inserting the medal into the medal insertion slot 45 or operating the credit insertion button 47. There is a risk that some players will misunderstand that the mode is decided. Since the player misunderstands that the type of production mode has been decided at the time of setting the bet, the subsequent operation timing of the start lever 41 selects a type of production mode different from the desired type of production mode. There is a risk that the timing will be the target. In particular, when the bet is set at a short timing when the remaining switching period for which the desired type of effect mode is selected is set and the start lever 41 is operated immediately, a type different from the desired type of effect mode is used. There is a high possibility that the production mode will be decided.

On the other hand, the slot machine 10 is configured to reset the remaining switching period for the type of effect mode selected at that time to the initial value at the timing when the bet is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the second corresponding image is displayed in the foreground in the selection target mode image G2, and the remaining switching period displayed in the switching period image G3 is 1 as the initial value. When the bet is set in the situation of / 5, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), the switching period is maintained while maintaining the state in which the second corresponding image is displayed in the foreground in the selection target mode image G2. The remaining switching period displayed on the image G3 is returned to the initial value. As a result, even if the player misunderstands that the bet setting is the operation for determining the type of the effect mode, it is possible to determine the desired type of effect mode as the effect mode for the current addition period. It becomes.

Hereinafter, the processing configuration for determining the effect mode as described above will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the effect mode selection process executed by the effect side MPU 92. The effect mode selection process is executed in the effect control process (FIG. 56) during AT, which will be described later.

First, by determining whether or not "1" is set in the selection period flag provided in the effect side RAM 94, it is determined whether or not it is the effect mode selection period (step S2401). The selection period flag is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify whether or not it is the selection period of the production mode. When "1" is not set in the selection period flag and it is not the selection period of the effect mode (step S2401: NO), "1" is set in the start effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94. By determining whether or not the value of the effect control counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 is "0", it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the effect mode selection period (step S2402). The start effect flag is a flag for the effect side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the situation is after the start effect of the addition period is started by receiving the start command of the addition period from the main MPU 72. The effect control counter is a counter for specifying the switching timing of various effects on the effect side MPU 92.

When a negative determination is made in step S2402, a process for starting the start effect of the addition period is executed on condition that the start command of the addition period is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2403: YES). Specifically, first, the start effect table for the addition period is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2404). The start effect table for the addition period is a table in which various data for executing the start effect of the addition period are set. The production side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the start effect table of the addition period, so that the start effect of the addition period can be performed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. To be executed. Further, the start effect reference value is set in the effect control counter of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2405), and "1" is set in the start effect flag of the effect side RAM 94. The start effect reference value corresponds to the freeze period (specifically, 5 seconds) at the time of transition to the additional period, which is set in the main MPU 72 when shifting to the additional period. In addition, the various data set in the start effect table for the additional period are data that enable the start effect of the additional period to be executed over the freeze period at the time of transition to the additional period. As a result, the start effect of the additional period is executed over the freeze period at the time of transition to the additional period.

The value set in the effect control counter is periodically (for example, 4 milliseconds) subtracted. Then, when the value of the effect control counter becomes "0" after the start effect reference value is set in the effect control counter in step S2405, it means that the start effect of the addition period has ended. At that timing, the freeze period at the time of transition to the addition period on the main MPU 72 also ends. When "1" is set in the start effect flag of the effect side RAM 94, but the value of the effect control counter of the effect side RAM 94 is "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, and the effect mode is set. Execute the process to start the selection period.

Specifically, first, the effect mode selection period table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2407). The effect mode selection period table is a table in which various data for executing the effect corresponding to the effect mode selection period are set. By controlling the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the table for the selection period of the effect mode, the effect side MPU 92 sets the effect mode selection period on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Make the corresponding effect perform. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the mode determination image G1 shown in FIGS. 47 (a) to 47 (d).

After that, the target effect counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2408). The target effect counter is a counter for the effect side MPU 92 to specify the effect mode to be selected in the selection target mode image G2 in the mode determination image G1. When the value of the target effect counter is "0", the effect mode selected in the selection target mode image G2 is the first effect mode, and when the value of the target effect counter is "1", the selection target mode The effect mode selected in the image G2 is the second effect mode, and when the value of the selection target counter is "2", the effect mode selected in the selection target mode image G2 is the third effect mode. It becomes. In the selection period table of the above-mentioned effect mode, data for displaying the selection target mode image G2 corresponding to each effect mode being the selection target on the image display device 63 is set, and the effect side. The MPU 92 executes the display control of the image display device 63 based on the data corresponding to the value of the selection target counter among these data, so that the selection target mode image corresponding to the type of the production mode currently selected is selected. Make G2 displayed.

After that, the switching reference value is set in the effect control counter of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2409), the selection period flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1", and the start effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0". (Step S2410). The switching reference value corresponds to the remaining switching period (specifically, 3 seconds) until the effect mode selected in the selection target mode image G2 is switched to the next type of effect mode. The value set in the effect control counter is periodically (for example, 4 milliseconds) subtracted.

When "1" is set in the selection period flag of the effect side RAM 94, an affirmative determination is made in step S2401 and the process during the selection period is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a bet setting command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2411), and whether or not a credit increase command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2412). As already explained, the bet setting command is used when the bet is set based on the insertion of medals into the medal insertion slot 45 in the start waiting process (FIG. 14) of the main MPU 72, or the bet is set based on the operation of the credit insertion button 47. Is a command transmitted from the main MPU 72 when is executed (step S404, step S408). Further, as described above, the credit increase command is mainly used when the value of the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74 is added by 1 based on the insertion of medals into the medal insertion slot 45 in the start waiting process (FIG. 14) of the main MPU 72. This is a command transmitted from the side MPU 72 (step S410).

When the bet setting command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2411: YES), or when the credit increase command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2412: YES), the selection target mode image G2 is selected. For the type of effect mode that is set, the process for resetting the remaining switching period is executed. In this process, after setting the switching reference value in the effect control counter of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2413), the reset adjustment process is executed (step S2414). In the reset adjustment process, the data for displaying the switching period image G3 in the selection period table of the effect mode is adjusted to the data for returning the remaining switching period displayed on the switching period image G3 to the initial value. As a result, even if an image in which the remaining switching period is partially reduced is displayed in the switching period image G3 as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the image is selected as shown in FIG. 47 (d). The remaining switching period displayed on the switching period image G3 is returned to the initial value without changing the type of the corresponding image displayed in the foreground in the target mode image G2.

When "1" is set in the selection period flag of the production side RAM 94 and the game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2415: YES), the value of the target production counter of the production side RAM 94 is set. The corresponding additional period table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2416), and the selection period flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2417). As described above, the game start command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 72 after the lottery of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the main MPU 72 (step S513). Since the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) is executed when a game start trigger occurs based on the operation of the start lever 41, the game start command is transmitted when the start trigger occurs. Then, when the game start command is received from the main MPU 72, the production side MPU 92 executes the processes of steps S2416 and S2417, and the game start trigger is generated based on the operation of the start lever 41. If this is the case, the effect mode selection period ends, and the type of effect mode selected in the selection target mode image G2 at that time becomes the type of effect mode determined as the execution target in the current addition period. ..

When "1" is set in the selection period flag of the effect side RAM 94 and the value of the effect control counter of the effect side RAM 94 is "0" (step S2418: YES), the selection target mode image G2 This means that the remaining switching period until the effect mode selected in is switched to the next type of effect mode has elapsed. In this case, when the value of the target effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 is added by 1 (step S2419) and the value of the target effect counter after the addition exceeds "2" (step S2420: YES), the said Clear the target production counter to "0" (step S2421). As a result, when the remaining switching period elapses, the effect mode selected in the selection target mode image G2 is switched to the next type of effect mode.

FIG. 49 is a time chart showing how the type of effect mode to be executed is determined in the addition period in the effect mode selection period. FIG. 49A shows a situation in which the effect mode is selected, FIG. 49B shows a period in which the first effect mode is selected in the selection target mode image G2, and FIG. 49C shows a period in which the first effect mode is selected. The period in which the second effect mode is selected in the selection target mode image G2 is shown, and FIG. 49 (d) shows the period in which the third effect mode is selected in the selection target mode image G2. (E) shows the remaining switching period measured by using the effect control counter of the effect side RAM 94, FIG. 49 (f) shows the operation timing of the start lever 41, and FIG. 49 (g) shows the main RAM 74 of the effect side RAM 74. Indicates the timing at which the value of the bet number setting counter 74a or the credit counter 74b increases.

First, a case where a replay prize (specifically, a first chance replay prize or a second chance replay prize) is established in the previous game and the addition period is started in the next game will be described.

If the index value IV = 14 or 15 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the previous game, and the additional period transition is won in the additional period transition lottery process (step S2203), the first chance replay is performed. A process for shifting to the additional period is executed in the game in which the winning or the second chance replay winning is established. Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), the selection period of the effect mode is started at the timing of t1 when the freeze period at the time of transition to the addition period elapses. In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the mode determination image G1 as shown in FIG. 47 (a). Further, at the timing when the display of the mode determination image G1 is started, the selection target is the first effect mode as shown in FIG. 49 (b), and the first effect is in the foreground of the selection target mode image G2. The first corresponding image corresponding to the mode is displayed. Further, at the timing of t1, the initial value of the remaining switching period is set in the effect control counter of the effect side RAM 94 as shown in FIG. 49 (e), and the measurement of the remaining switching period is started.

After that, the value of the effect control counter becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 49 (e) at each of the timing of t2, the timing of t3, and the timing of t4. That is, the measurement of the remaining switching period is completed at each of these timings. Therefore, at the timing of t2, the selection target is changed from the first effect mode to the second effect mode as shown in FIGS. 49 (b) and 49 (c). In this case, the corresponding image displayed in the foreground in the selection target mode image G2 is changed from the first corresponding image corresponding to the first effect mode to the second corresponding image corresponding to the second effect mode. Further, at the timing of t3, the selection target is changed from the second effect mode to the third effect mode as shown in FIGS. 49 (c) and 49 (d). In this case, the corresponding image displayed in the foreground in the selection target mode image G2 is changed from the second corresponding image corresponding to the second effect mode to the third corresponding image corresponding to the third effect mode. Further, at the timing of t4, the selection target is changed from the third effect mode to the first effect mode as shown in FIGS. 49 (b) and 49 (d). In this case, the corresponding image displayed in the foreground in the selection target mode image G2 is changed from the third corresponding image corresponding to the third effect mode to the first corresponding image corresponding to the first effect mode.

After that, at the timing of t5, the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where the maximum number of betting media is bet as shown in FIG. 49 (f). Therefore, an opportunity to start the game occurs. The type of effect mode selected at the timing of t5 is the first effect mode as shown in FIG. 49 (b). Therefore, the type of effect mode to be executed in this addition period is the first effect mode. Then, the addition period in which the execution target of the effect is the first effect mode is started.

Next, a case will be described in which the additional period is started in the next game without the replay winning in the previous game being established.

When the index values IV = 10 to 13, 18 to 21 are won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the previous game, and the additional period transition is won in the additional period transition lottery process (step S2203). A process for shifting to the additional period is executed in the game in which the replay prize is not established. Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), the selection period of the effect mode is started at the timing of t6 when the freeze period at the time of transition to the addition period elapses. In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the mode determination image G1 as shown in FIG. 47 (a). Further, at the timing when the display of the mode determination image G1 is started, the selection target is the first effect mode as shown in FIG. 49 (b), and the first effect is in the foreground of the selection target mode image G2. The first corresponding image corresponding to the mode is displayed. Further, at the timing of t1, the initial value of the remaining switching period is set in the effect control counter of the effect side RAM 94 as shown in FIG. 49 (e), and the measurement of the remaining switching period is started.

After that, at the timing of t7, the value of the effect control counter becomes “0” as shown in FIG. 49 (e). That is, the measurement of the remaining switching period is completed at the timing of t7. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the selection target is changed from the first effect mode to the second effect mode as shown in FIGS. 49 (b) and 49 (c). In this case, the corresponding image displayed in the foreground in the selection target mode image G2 is changed from the first corresponding image corresponding to the first effect mode to the second corresponding image corresponding to the second effect mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 49 (e), at the timing of t8, which is the timing before the measurement of the remaining switching period is completed, as shown in FIG. 49 (g), the bet number setting counter 74a or the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74 The value of increases. That is, a bet setting or an increase in virtual medals is generated by inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 45, or a bet setting is generated by operating the credit insertion button 47. In this case, in the situation where the effect mode to be selected is maintained in the second effect mode as shown in FIG. 49 (c), the initial value of the remaining switching period is reset as shown in FIG. 49 (e). ..

After that, at the timing of t9, the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where the maximum number of betting media is bet as shown in FIG. 49 (f). Therefore, an opportunity to start the game occurs. The type of effect mode selected at the timing of t9 is the second effect mode as shown in FIG. 49 (c). Therefore, the type of effect mode to be executed in this addition period is the second effect mode. Then, the addition period in which the execution target of the effect is the second effect mode is started.

At the timing when the bet is set as described above, the remaining switching period for the type of effect mode selected at that time is reset to the initial value. As a result, even if the player misunderstands that the bet setting is the operation for determining the type of the effect mode, it is possible to determine the desired type of effect mode as the effect mode for the current addition period. It becomes.

Further, even if the bet is not set, even if the number of virtual medals increases based on the insertion of medals into the medal insertion slot 45, the remaining switching period for the production mode of the type to be selected at that time is initial. It is reset to the value. As a result, even if the player misunderstands that inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 45 is an operation for determining the type of the effect mode, the desired type of effect mode is determined as the effect mode for this addition period. It becomes possible to obtain.

Next, the process for the additional period executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The addition period process is executed in step S2215 in the AT state process (FIG. 44) at the start of the game.

First, the second additional lottery process is executed (step S2501). In the second additional lottery process, the remaining number of sets of the AT state ST5 is increased by using the second additional lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. It is decided by lottery whether or not to generate the additional addition. In the second additional lottery process, if an index value IV other than index values IV = 10 to 15, 18 to 21 is won, or if none of the index values IV is won, there is a 30% probability that one set will be won. The addition is selected, the addition of 2 sets is selected with a probability of 10%, and the addition of 3 sets is selected with a probability of 10%. If the index value IV = 10 is won, there is a 10% chance that one set will be added, a 30% chance that two sets will be added, and a 60% chance that three sets will be added. NS. If the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 50% chance that one set of additions will be selected, a 25% chance that two sets of additions will be selected, and a 25% chance that three sets of additions will be selected. NS. If the index value IV = 12 is won, there is a 60% chance that one set will be added, a 20% chance that two sets will be added, and a 20% chance that three sets will be added. NS. If the index value IV = 13 is won, there is a 20% chance that one set will be added, a 40% chance that two sets will be added, and a 40% chance that three sets will be added. NS. If the index value IV = 14 is won, there is a 30% chance that one set will be added, a 35% chance that two sets will be added, and a 35% chance that three sets will be added. NS. If the index value IV = 15 is won, there is a 50% chance that one set of additions will be selected, a 25% chance that two sets of additions will be selected, and a 25% chance that three sets of additions will be selected. NS. If the index value IV = 18 or 19 is won, there is a 20% chance that one set will be added, a 40% chance that two sets will be added, and a 40% chance that three sets will be added. Be selected. If the index value IV = 20 or 21 is won, there is a 10% chance that one set will be added, a 40% chance that two sets will be added, and a 50% chance that three sets will be added. Be selected.

As described above, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), increases the expected value of the number of sets to be added. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15). In addition, if an index value IV other than index values IV = 10 to 15, 18 to 21 is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 15), or if none of the index values IV is won, the number of sets is not added. On the other hand, when the index value IV = 10 to 15, 18 to 21 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), the number of sets is surely added. As a result, the player expects to win any of the index values IV = 10 to 15, 18 to 21 in the combination lottery process (FIG. 15) during the addition period.

When the addition of the number of sets of one or more times is selected in the second addition lottery process (step S2501) (step S2502: YES), the addition process of the number of sets is executed (step S2503). In the set count addition process, the set count selected in the second additional lottery process (step S2501) is added to the set count counter of the main RAM 74.

After that, it is determined whether or not the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in this game (step S2504). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the index values IV = 1 to 10 has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 15) for this combination. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2504, "1" is set in the midway freeze occurrence flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2505). The midway freeze occurrence flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not it is necessary to generate a freeze period in the middle of the game.

After that, the freeze counter setting process is executed (step S2506). In the freeze counter setting process, an intermediate freeze period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74. The freeze period set in the freeze counter is subtracted by the timer subtraction process in step S208 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is activated as described above. If the freeze counter value is 1 or more in the situation where the freeze occurrence flag is set to "1", "1" is not set to any of the ending flags provided in the main RAM 74. Is a condition, and the process waits in step S312 of the normal process (FIG. 13) or step S720 of the reel control process (FIG. 23). In addition, a notification indicating that the number of sets has been added is executed in a situation where a midway freeze period has occurred, and the midway freeze period is a period equal to or longer than the period in which the notification is executed. As a result, in the game in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R during the addition period is notified, the addition corresponding voice is input before the stop operation is performed on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which are the targets of the notification of the stop order. When the additional notification of the number of sets including is executed, the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the operation of the player is surely prevented in the situation where the notification is executed. Therefore, even if the player is surprised at the generation of the additional voice, it is possible to prevent the player from making a mistake in the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

The timing at which the process of step S312 of the normal process (FIG. 13) is executed is the timing after the combination lottery process (FIG. 15) is executed and before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. The timing at which the process of step S720 of the reel control process (FIG. 23) is executed is that one reel 32L, 32M, 32M, in the situation where the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop command has not yet been generated exists. This is the timing after the stop of the rotation of 32R is completed. Therefore, the additional notification of the number of sets and the freeze period in the middle are the timing immediately before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, and the timing when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which is the first stop target, is stopped. , And the timing at which the rotation stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which is the second stop target, is completed.

After that, it is determined in the lottery process (FIG. 15) of this combination whether or not any of the index values IV = 7 to 10 has been won (step S2507). As described above, when any of the index values IV = 1 to 10 is won in the AT state ST5, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, but when the index value IV = 1 to 6 Is notified of the types of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the first stop target and the second stop target, respectively, whereas when the index value IV = 7 to 10, the reel 32L of the first stop target, The types of 32M and 32R are notified, but the types of reels 32L, 32M and 32R to be stopped second and third are not notified.

When any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 is won in the lottery process of this combination (FIG. 15) (step S2507: NO), the lottery process of the occurrence timing is executed (step S2508). In the generation timing lottery process, the timing for generating the halfway freeze period is determined by lottery by using the generation timing lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. The mid-freeze period occurs at the start timing, which is the timing after the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) is executed and before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, and the first stop. At the timing of the first stop, which is the timing when the rotation stop of the target reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed, and at the timing when the rotation stop of the target reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed. There is a certain timing at the time of the second stop. The probability of being selected in the lottery process of the occurrence timing in step S2508 is the same regardless of whether it is the start timing, the first stop timing, or the second stop timing.

When the start timing is selected in the occurrence timing lottery process (step S2508) (step S2509: YES), "1" is set in the start occurrence flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2510). The start occurrence flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the midway freeze period should be generated at the start timing.

In the normal process (FIG. 13), "1" is not set in any of the ending flags provided in the main RAM 74 (step S308: NO), and the freeze occurrence flag in the middle of the main RAM 74 and the main side When "1" is set in both of the start-time generation flags of the RAM 74 (step S309 and step S310: YES), a freeze generation command is transmitted to the effector MPU 92 (step S311). The freeze generation command is a command for causing the effecting side MPU 92 to recognize that the intermediate freeze period is generated by the control of the main side MPU 72. When the production side MPU 92 receives the freeze generation command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the additional notification of the set number of times including the additional corresponding voice is executed. After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S312). If the measurement of the freeze period set in the freeze counter is not completed, the process of step S312 is repeatedly executed by making a negative determination in step S312. As a result, the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is waited until the measurement of the freeze period is completed. When the measurement of the freeze period is completed, an affirmative determination is made in step S312 and the reel control process (FIG. 23) in step S313 is started, so that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

Returning to the explanation of the additional period process (FIG. 50), the process of setting "1" to the start occurrence flag of the main RAM 74 in step S2510 was added and won in the second additional lottery process (step S2501). In this case, even when the index value IV = 7 to 10 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 15) of the present combination (step S2507: YES), the execution is performed. As described above, when any of the index values IV = 7 to 10 is won in the AT state ST5, the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped first are notified, but the second stop target and the third stop are notified. The types of target reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not notified. In this configuration, the main side is the case where the additional lottery process (step S2501) is performed and the index value IV = 7 to 10 is won in the current role lottery process (FIG. 15). By setting "1" to the start generation flag of the RAM 74, in a game in which only the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped first are notified, the additional lottery process (step S2501) is performed to win the additional winning. In such a case, it is possible to execute the additional notification of the set number of times including the additional corresponding voice with an intermediate freeze period at the timing before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. ..

When the timing at the time of the first stop is selected in the lottery process of the occurrence timing (step S2508) (step S2511: YES), "1" is set in the first stop occurrence flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2511: YES). Step S2512). The first stop generation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the midway freeze period should be generated at the timing of the first stop.

In the reel control process (FIG. 23), "1" is not set in any of the ending flags provided in the main RAM 74 (step S716: NO), and the freeze occurrence flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". 1 ”is set (step S717: YES), and“ 1 ”is set to the first stop occurrence flag of the main RAM 74 in the situation where the first stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R have been stopped. If this is the case (step S718: YES), a freeze generation command is transmitted to the effector MPU 92 (step S719). The freeze generation command is a command for causing the effecting side MPU 92 to recognize that the intermediate freeze period is generated by the control of the main side MPU 72. When the production side MPU 92 receives the freeze generation command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the additional notification of the set number of times including the additional corresponding voice is executed. After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S720). If the measurement of the freeze period set in the freeze counter is not completed, the process of step S720 is repeatedly executed by making a negative determination in step S720. As a result, the activation of the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is waited until the measurement of the freeze period is completed. When the measurement of the freeze period is completed, an affirmative judgment is made in step S720, and the process of step S704 of the reel control process (FIG. 23) is executed, so that the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is enabled. NS.

Returning to the explanation of the additional period processing (FIG. 50), when the timing at the time of the second stop is selected in the generation timing lottery processing (step S2508) (step S2511: NO), the first RAM 74 provided on the main side RAM 74. 2 “1” is set in the stop generation flag (step S2513). The second stop generation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the midway freeze period should be generated at the timing of the second stop.

In the reel control process (FIG. 23), "1" is not set in any of the ending flags provided in the main RAM 74 (step S716: NO), and the freeze occurrence flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". 1 ”is set (step S717: YES), and“ 1 ”is set in the second stop occurrence flag of the main RAM 74 in the situation where the stops of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be the second stop are completed. If this is the case (step S718: YES), a freeze generation command is transmitted to the effector MPU 92 (step S719). The freeze generation command is a command for causing the effecting side MPU 92 to recognize that the intermediate freeze period is generated by the control of the main side MPU 72. When the production side MPU 92 receives the freeze generation command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the additional notification of the set number of times including the additional corresponding voice is executed. After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S720). If the measurement of the freeze period set in the freeze counter is not completed, the process of step S720 is repeatedly executed by making a negative determination in step S720. As a result, the activation of the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is waited until the measurement of the freeze period is completed. When the measurement of the freeze period is completed, an affirmative judgment is made in step S720, and the process of step S704 of the reel control process (FIG. 23) is executed, so that the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is enabled. NS.

When the process of step S2510, the process of step S2512, or the process of step S2513 is executed, the freeze-corresponding winning command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2514). The freeze-compatible winning command includes information indicating that the additional lottery has been won in the second additional lottery process (step S2501), information on the number of sets of additional targets selected in the second additional lottery process (step S2501), and information. And information indicating that a freeze period will occur in the middle of this game is included. When the directing MPU 92 receives the freeze-corresponding winning command, it executes the corresponding process. The content of the process will be described later.

On the other hand, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified in this game, that is, when any of the index values IV = 1 to 10 is not won in the lottery process (FIG. 15) of the current combination ( Step S2504: NO), a non-freeze-compatible winning command is transmitted to the directing MPU 92 (step S2515). The non-freeze compatible winning command includes information indicating that the additional winning has been achieved in the second additional lottery process (step S2501), and information on the number of sets of additional targets selected in the second additional lottery process (step S2501). , And information indicating that there is no midway freeze period in this game. When the directing MPU 92 receives the non-freeze compatible winning command, it executes the corresponding process. The content of the process will be described later.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an effect control process during the addition period executed by the effect side MPU 92. The effect control process during the addition period is executed in the effect control process (FIG. 56) during AT, which will be described later.

When a freeze-corresponding winning command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2601: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the target production counter of the production side RAM 94 is "1", and in this addition period. It is determined whether or not the effect mode to be selected is the second effect mode (step S2602). When the mode is not the second effect mode (step S2602: NO), the memory processing of the number of additional sets is executed (step S2603). In the storage process of the number of additional sets, the information on the number of sets of the additional target set in the freeze-corresponding winning command received this time is set in the additional set number counter provided in the effect side RAM 94. The additional set number counter is a counter for specifying the number of sets of the additional target selected in the latest second additional lottery process (step S2501) by the effect side MPU 92. In addition, the memory processing of the total number of additional sets is executed (step S2604). In the storage process of the total number of additional sets, the information on the number of sets to be added set in the freeze-corresponding winning command received this time is added to the total number of sets counter provided in the effect side RAM 94. The total number of sets counter is a counter for specifying the total number of sets added in the current addition period by the effect side MPU 92.

As described above, the first effect mode and the third effect mode are modes in which the number of sets to be added is notified when it is notified that the number of sets has been added and the winning has been achieved. The effect mode is a mode in which the number of sets to be added is not notified when it is notified that the number of sets has been added and the winning has been achieved. In this case, in the case of the first effect mode or the third effect mode as described above, the processes of steps S2603 and S2604 are executed, so that the number of sets is added and won in the first effect mode and the third effect mode. It is possible to notify the number of sets to be added when notifying that the result has been obtained.

In the effect control process during the addition period, it is determined whether or not a freeze occurrence command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2605). The freeze occurrence command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 in step S311 in the normal process (FIG. 13) when the occurrence timing of the intermediate freeze period is the start timing, and the occurrence timing of the intermediate freeze period is the first stop. If it is the timing of the above or the timing at the time of the second stop, it is transmitted from the main MPU 72 in step S719 in the reel control process (FIG. 23).

When the freeze generation command is received (step S2605: YES), the corresponding audio data is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2606). The production side MPU 92 performs sound output control corresponding to the additional sound data in the sound output control process to the speaker 62, so that the additional notification period (specifically, 2 seconds) is a period equal to or less than the mid-freeze period. The additional voice corresponding to the relatively loud sound is output.

After that, by determining whether or not the value of the target effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 is "1", it is determined whether or not the effect mode selected in this addition period is the second effect mode. Determine (step S2607). When the mode is not the second effect mode (step S2607: NO), the display table for notifying the number of times is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2608). The display table for notifying the number of times is provided so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with values (specifically, "1" to "3") that can be set in the additional set number counter of the effect side RAM 94. In step S2608, a display table for notifying the number of times of the type corresponding to the value of the additional set number counter of the effect side RAM 94 is read out. By controlling the display of the image display device 63 according to the display table for notifying the number of times, the production side MPU 92 not only displays an image indicating that the number of sets has been added in the image display device 63, but also targets the addition in this addition. An image showing the number of times the set has been made is displayed. As a result, when it is notified that the number of sets has been added and won in the first effect mode and the third effect mode, the number of sets to be added is also notified.

In the second effect mode (step S2607: YES), the display table for non-notification of the number of times is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2609). The production side MPU 92 displays and controls the image display device 63 according to the display table for non-notification of the number of times, so that an image indicating that the number of sets has been added is displayed in the image display device 63, but this addition is performed. The image showing the number of sets to be added is not displayed. As a result, when it is notified that the number of sets has been added and won in the second effect mode, the number of sets to be added is not notified.

In the effect control process during the addition period, it is determined whether or not a non-freeze compatible winning command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2610). The non-freeze compatible winning command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 72 when an additional winning is achieved in the second additional lottery process (step S2501) in a game in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified.

When the non-freeze compatible winning command is received (step S2610: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the target production counter of the production side RAM 94 is "2", so that the selection target is selected in the current addition period. It is determined whether or not the effect mode is the third effect mode (step S2611). As already explained, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are modes in which the notification that the set number is added and the winning is executed is executed even in the situation where the freeze period does not occur in the middle, whereas the third effect mode is executed. The effect mode is a mode in which the notification that the number of sets is added and the winning is not executed is not executed in the situation where the freeze period does not occur in the middle.

In the case of the third effect mode (step S2611: YES), the processes after step S2612 are not executed. As a result, in the third effect mode, the notification that the set number is added and the winning is not executed is not executed in the situation where the freeze period does not occur in the middle.

In the case of the first effect mode or the second effect mode (step S2611: NO), the lottery process of the notification occurrence timing is executed (step S2612). In the lottery process of the notification occurrence timing, the notification occurrence timing lottery table provided in the production side ROM 93 and the lottery counter that is regularly updated in the production side RAM 94 are used to notify that the number of sets has been added and the winning has been achieved. The timing of occurrence is determined by lottery. The notification occurrence timing is the timing at the start of the production side, which is the timing after the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) is executed and before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, and the first stop. The timing at the time of the first stop on the production side, which is the timing when the rotation stop of the target reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed, and the stop of the rotation of the target reels 32L, 32M, 32R are completed. There is a timing at the time of the second stop on the production side, which is the timing of the reeling. The probability of being selected in the lottery process of the notification occurrence timing in step S2612 is the same regardless of whether it is the start timing, the first stop timing, or the second stop timing. Information corresponding to the timing selected in the lottery process (step S2612) of the notification occurrence timing is stored in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2613).

The timing at which the game start command (step S513) is received from the main MPU 72 corresponds to the timing at the start of the production side. The timing at which the stop command command (step S707) at the time of the first stop is received from the main MPU 72 corresponds to the timing at the time of the first stop on the effect side. The timing at which the stop command command (step S707) at the time of the second stop is received from the main MPU 72 corresponds to the timing at the time of the second stop on the effect side.

After that, by determining whether or not the value of the target effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 is "0", it is determined whether or not the effect mode selected in this addition period is the first effect mode. Determine (step S2614). As already explained, the first effect mode is a mode in which the number of sets to be added is notified when it is notified that the number of sets has been added and the winning has been achieved, whereas the second effect mode is the mode in which the number of sets to be added is notified. This is a mode in which the number of sets to be added is not notified when it is notified that the additional winning has been achieved.

In the case of the first effect mode (step S2614: YES), the memory processing of the number of additional sets is executed (step S2615). In the storage process of the number of additional sets, the information on the number of sets of the additional target set in the non-freeze compatible winning command received this time is set in the additional set number counter of the effect side RAM 94. As already described, the additional set number counter is a counter for specifying the number of sets of the additional target selected in the latest second additional lottery process (step S2501) by the effect side MPU 92. In addition, the storage process of the total number of additional sets is executed (step S2616). In the storage process of the total number of additional sets, the information on the number of sets to be added set in the non-freeze compatible winning command received this time is added to the total number of sets counter of the effect side RAM 94. As already described, the total set number counter is a counter for specifying the total number of sets added in the current addition period on the production side MPU 92.

In the effect control process during the addition period, it is determined whether or not it is the notification occurrence timing (step S2617). When the production side RAM 94 stores information corresponding to the timing at the start of the production side, when a game start command is received from the main MPU 72, an affirmative judgment is made in step S2617, and the production side RAM 94 has the production side. When the information corresponding to the timing at the time of the first stop is stored, when the stop command command corresponding to the first stop is received from the main MPU 72, an affirmative judgment is made in step S2617, and the effect side RAM 94 is used. When the information corresponding to the timing at the time of the second stop on the production side is stored, when the stop command command corresponding to the second stop is received from the main MPU 72, an affirmative determination is made in step S2617.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2617, the corresponding audio data is read from the effect side ROM 93 by adding it to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2618). The production side MPU 92 performs sound output control corresponding to the additional sound data in the sound output control process to the speaker 62, so that the sound output is relatively loud over the additional notification period (specifically, 2 seconds). Make sure that the additional audio is output.

After that, by determining whether or not the value of the target effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 is "0", it is determined whether or not the effect mode selected in this addition period is the first effect mode. Determine (step S2619). In the case of the first effect mode (step S2619: YES), the display table for notifying the number of times is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2620). The display table for notifying the number of times is provided so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with values (specifically, "1" to "3") that can be set in the additional set number counter of the effect side RAM 94. In step S2620, a display table for notification of the number of times of the type corresponding to the value of the additional set number counter of the effect side RAM 94 is read out. By controlling the display of the image display device 63 according to the display table for notifying the number of times, the production side MPU 92 not only displays an image indicating that the number of sets has been added in the image display device 63, but also targets the addition in this addition. An image showing the number of times the set has been made is displayed. As a result, when it is notified that the number of sets has been added and won in the first effect mode, the number of sets to be added is also notified.

In the second effect mode (step S2619: NO), the display table for notifying the number of times is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2621). The production side MPU 92 displays and controls the image display device 63 according to the display table for non-notification of the number of times, so that an image indicating that the number of sets has been added is displayed in the image display device 63, but this addition is performed. The image showing the number of sets to be added is not displayed. As a result, when it is notified that the number of sets has been added and won in the second effect mode, the number of sets to be added is not notified.

In the effect control process during the addition period, it is determined whether or not the end command of the addition period has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2622). When the addition period ends, the end command of the addition period is transmitted in step S2310 in the AT process (FIG. 45). When the end command of the addition period is received (step S2622: YES), it becomes a selection target in the current addition period by determining whether or not the value of the target production counter of the effect side RAM 94 is "1". It is determined whether or not the effect mode is the second effect mode (step S2623). When the mode is not the second effect mode (step S2623: NO), the end table for notification of the number of times is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2624). The end table for notifying the number of times is a table for displaying an image showing the total number of times of the set times added in the current addition period on the image display device 63. In step S2624, after reading the end table for the number-of-times notification into the effect-side RAM 94, the information stored in the total set number-of-times counter of the effect-side RAM 94 is written to the end table for the number-of-times notification. Then, the display control of the image display device 63 is executed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the end table for the number-of-times notification, so that the image showing the total number of sets given in the current addition period is the image display device 63. Is displayed at.

In the case of the second effect mode (step S2623: YES), the end table for non-notification of the number of times is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2625). By controlling the display of the image display device 63 according to the end table for non-notification of the number of times, the production side MPU 92 displays an image indicating that the addition period has ended in the image display device 63, but the addition period this time The image showing the total number of sets given in the above is not displayed.

Next, a state in which the setting mode of the intermediate freeze period differs depending on whether or not the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 52 (a) shows the period during which one game is executed, FIG. 52 (b) shows the period during which the left reel 32L is rotating, and FIG. 52 (c) shows the period during which the middle reel 32M is rotating. 52 (d) shows the period during which the right reel 32R is rotating, and FIG. 52 (e) shows the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66. FIG. 52 (f) shows a situation in which a freeze period occurs in the middle, and FIG. 52 (g) shows a period in which the additional corresponding sound is output from the speaker 62.

During the addition period, a new game is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 52 (a), and rotation is started on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as shown in FIGS. 52 (b) to 52 (d). Will be done. Further, in the game, since the winning combination is won by any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), the image display device is shown at the timing of the t1 as shown in FIG. 52 (e). Notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started on 63 and the combined display unit 66.

After that, when the middle stop button 43 is operated at the timing of t2, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped first as shown in FIG. 52 (c). In this case, the timing at the time of the first stop is selected in the lottery process of the occurrence timing in step S2508 of the addition period process (FIG. 50) at the start of this game. Therefore, at the timing of t2, the measurement of the halfway freeze period is started as shown in FIG. 52 (f), and the output of the additional voice corresponding to the addition from the speaker 62 is started as shown in FIG. 52 (g). Then, at the timing of t3, the output of the additional corresponding voice is stopped as shown in FIG. 52 (g), and at the timing of t4 thereafter, the measurement of the halfway freeze period is completed as shown in FIG. 52 (f). As a result, the output of the additional voice is completed in the situation where the operation for stopping the second stop is invalidated. Therefore, even if the player is surprised by the output of the additional voice with a relatively loud sound, it is possible. This makes it possible to prevent the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from being stopped in the wrong order.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52 (d), the right reel 32R is secondly stopped at the timing of t5, and as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the left reel 32L is thirdly stopped at the timing of t6. At the timing of t6, this game ends as shown in FIG. 52 (a). Further, at the timing of t6, the stop order notification ends as shown in FIG. 52 (e).

Then, at the timing of t7, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 52 (a). Further, in the game, since the winning combination is won by any of the index values IV = 1 to 10 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), the image display device is shown at the timing of the t7 as shown in FIG. 52 (e). Notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started on 63 and the combined display unit 66.

In this case, the timing at the start is selected in the lottery process of the occurrence timing in step S2508 of the process for the additional period (FIG. 50) at the start of this game. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the measurement of the halfway freeze period is started as shown in FIG. 52 (f), and the output of the additional voice corresponding to the addition from the speaker 62 is started as shown in FIG. 52 (g). Then, at the timing of t8, the output of the additional corresponding voice is stopped as shown in FIG. 52 (g), and at the timing of t9 thereafter, the measurement of the halfway freeze period is completed as shown in FIG. 52 (f). As a result, the output of the additional voice is completed before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, so even if the player is surprised by the output of the additional voice with a relatively loud sound. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from being stopped in the wrong order.

Rotation is started on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as shown in FIGS. 52 (b) to 52 (d) at the timing of t9 when the measurement of the freeze period is completed. After that, as shown in FIG. 52 (d), the right reel 32R is stopped at the timing of t10, and as shown in FIG. 52 (c), the middle reel 32M is secondly stopped at the timing of t11. As shown, when the left reel 32L is thirdly stopped at the timing of t12, the current game ends at the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. 52 (a). Further, at the timing of t12, the stop order notification ends as shown in FIG. 52 (e).

After that, at the timing of t13, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 52 (a), and rotation is started on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as shown in FIGS. 52 (b) to 52 (d). NS. Further, in the game, since none of the index values IV = 1 to 10 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66 are shown in FIG. 52 (e). In, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified.

After that, when the left stop button 42 is operated at the timing of t14, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped first as shown in FIG. 52 (b). In this case, the timing at the time of the first stop on the production side is selected in the lottery process of the notification generation timing in step S2612 of the effect control process (FIG. 51) during the addition period at the start of this game. Therefore, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 52 (g), the output of the additional voice corresponding to the addition from the speaker 62 is started. However, in this game, since the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified, the midway freeze period does not occur as shown in FIG. 52 (f). Then, at the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 52 (g), the output of the additional corresponding voice is stopped. As a result, in the situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified, the additional corresponding voice is output in the situation where the freeze period during the forced game stop period does not occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52 (d), the right reel 32R is secondly stopped at the timing of t16, and as shown in FIG. 52 (c), the middle reel 32M is thirdly stopped at the timing of t17. At the timing of t17, this game ends as shown in FIG. 52 (a).

<About the ending period>
Next, the ending period in the AT state ST5 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an ending correspondence process executed by the main MPU 72. The ending correspondence process is executed in step S1917 in the second control process (FIG. 41) of the game section.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first ending flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2701). The first ending flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of game executions in the second section SC2, which is measured using the continuous game number counter 74c, is likely to reach the upper limit number of games. Is.

When "1" is not set in the first ending flag (step S2701: NO), the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74, the value of the AT continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74, and the main side. The sum of the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the set count counter provided in the RAM 74 and the value of the number of initial continuous games (50 games) in one set of the AT state ST5 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2. It is determined whether or not it is (step S2702). The AT continuation counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining continuous games in one set in the AT state ST5 by the main MPU 72. When the set of AT state ST5 continues, the initial number of continuous games in one set is 50 games, and the number of remaining continuous games can be increased by satisfying the addition condition in the middle of the one set. The set count counter is a counter for specifying the remaining set count in the AT state ST5 by the main MPU 72. The maximum number of games in the second section SC2 is set to 1500 games as already described. The maximum number of games in the second section SC2 is not limited to 1500 games, and may be less than 1500 games or more than 1500 games.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, "1" is set in the first ending flag (step S2703). When "1" is set in the first ending flag, the process for generating the addition of the remaining number of continuous games and the addition of the remaining number of sets is executed in the AT state ST5, although the details will be described later. The freeze period is not set when the addition occurs, and the effect of making the player aware that the addition has occurred is not executed.

After that, the first ending command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2704). The first ending command contains information on the number of games required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, that is, information corresponding to the difference in the value of the continuous game number counter 74c with respect to the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2. included. By receiving the first ending command, the directing MPU 92 can grasp that the first ending flag is set to "1" in the main MPU 72. When the production side MPU 92 receives the first ending command in a situation where the production according to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not yet started, the execution mode of the production in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is set to the ending period. Make sure that the corresponding execution mode is used.

Whether or not "1" is set in the second ending flag provided in the main RAM 74 when an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, a negative determination is made in step S2702, or the process of step S2704 is executed. (Step S2705). The second ending flag is for the main MPU 72 to specify that the limited total net increase number of game media measured by using the total acquisition number counter 74d is likely to reach the upper limit net increase number. It is a flag.

When "1" is not set in the second ending flag (step S2705: NO), the value of the AT continuation counter, the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the set count counter, and the number of initial continuation games in one set of the AT state ST5. The value obtained by adding the expected value of the game medium in the AT state ST5 to the sum of the value of (50 games) and the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is added to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d. It is determined whether or not it is (step S2706). The expected value of the game medium acquired in one game in the AT state ST5 is about five. The upper limit net increase number of the second section SC2 is set to 2400 as already explained. The upper limit net increase number of the second section SC2 is not limited to 2400, and may be less than 2400 or more than 2400.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, "1" is set in the second ending flag (step S2707). When "1" is set in the second ending flag, the process for generating the addition of the remaining number of continuous games and the addition of the remaining number of sets is executed in the AT state ST5, although the details will be described later. The freeze period is not set when the addition occurs, and the effect of making the player aware that the addition has occurred is not executed.

After that, the second ending command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2708). The second ending command contains information on the limited total net increase of game media required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, that is, the value of the total acquisition counter 74d with respect to the upper limit net increase of the second section SC2. Contains information corresponding to the difference between. By receiving the second ending command, the directing MPU 92 can grasp that the second ending flag is set to "1" in the main MPU 72. When the production side MPU 92 receives the second ending command in a situation where the production according to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not yet started, the execution mode of the production in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is set to the ending period. Make sure that the corresponding execution mode is used.

Next, the processing content of the main MPU 72 when "1" is set in the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 will be described.

The processing contents of the AT state processing (FIG. 44) at the start of the game are the first ending flag and the second ending flag even if "1" is set in the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74. It is the same as the situation where "1" is not set in both ending flags. Further, in the processing content of the AT processing (FIG. 45), even if "1" is set in the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74, the first ending flag and the second ending flag are set. It is the same as the situation where "1" is not set in both. As a result, even if "1" is set in the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74, "1" is not set in both the first ending flag and the second ending flag. Similarly, a process for adding the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 and a process for adding the remaining number of sets in the AT state ST5 are executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the processing content of these additional processes depending on whether or not "1" is set in the first and second ending flags, so that the processing configuration of the main MPU 72 can be simplified. Will be.

In the normal process (FIG. 13), when "1" is set in any of the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 (step S316: YES), the process of step S317 is not executed. As a result, when "1" is set in either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74, it is assumed that the control in the main MPU 72 shifts to the addition period of the AT state ST5. However, the freeze period for the transition to the additional period does not occur.

In the normal process (FIG. 13), when "1" is set in any of the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 (step S308: YES), the midway freeze occurrence flag and the start of the main RAM 74 Even if "1" is set in the time generation flag, the processes of steps S311 and S312 are not executed. Further, in the reel control process (FIG. 23), when "1" is set in either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 (step S716: YES), a freeze occurs in the middle of the main RAM 74. Even if "1" is set in the flag and "1" is set in the first stop occurrence flag in the situation where the first stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R have been stopped, step S719. And the process of step S720 is not executed. Further, in the reel control process (FIG. 23), when "1" is set in either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 (step S716: YES), a freeze occurs in the middle of the main RAM 74. Even if "1" is set in the flag and "1" is set in the second stop occurrence flag in the situation where the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped second are stopped, step S719. And the process of step S720 is not executed. As a result, when "1" is set in either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74, even if the number of sets in the addition period is added in the control of the main MPU 72, the number of sets is added. There is no freeze period on the way.

As described above, when there is a high possibility that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied and the effect corresponding to the ending period is generated, even if the transition to the additional period of the AT state ST5 occurs, the transition to the additional period is performed. The freeze period does not occur, and even if the number of sets is added during the addition period of the AT state ST5, the freeze period does not occur in the middle. As a result, in a situation where the production corresponding to the ending period has already been executed, it is possible to prevent a freeze period for forcibly waiting for the progress of the game to occur triggered by the execution of the addition process. Will be.

The execution mode of the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R differs depending on whether or not "1" is set in the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74. The contents will be described below. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a stop order notification process at the time of AT executed by the main MPU 72. The stop order notification process at the time of AT is executed in step S1308 in the stop order notification control process (FIG. 33) in the AT state ST5.

In the case of the AT state ST5, when any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) (step S2801: YES), the first bell winning can be established. The display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed on the combined display unit 66 (step S2802), and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which enables the establishment of the first bell winning. Is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 of the first bell winning command so that the image display device 63 is notified (step S2803). Further, in the case of the AT state ST5, if any of the index values IV = 7 to 9 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) (step S2804: YES), the second bell winning can be established. The display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed on the combined display unit 66 (step S2805), and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the second bell winning are performed. A second bell winning command for notifying the stop order on the image display device 63 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2806).

The processes of steps S2801 to S2806 are executed regardless of whether or not "1" is set in the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74. As a result, even if the production corresponding to the ending period is being executed in the AT state ST5, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 is won, the first bell prize can be established. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, and if any of the index values IV = 7 to 9 is won, the second bell winning can be established. The stop order is notified.

In the stop order notification process at the time of AT, in step S2807, it is determined whether or not the index value IV = 10 is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 15). As described above, the index value IV = 10 is set to the first bell winning data and the special bell winning data. When winning with an index value IV = 10, when the left reel 32L is first stopped, regardless of the subsequent stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. The first bell prize is established. On the other hand, when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped when the index value IV = 10 is won, the first bell is won or the first bell is won regardless of the subsequent stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. A special bell prize is established. In this case, the establishment of the special bell prize is prioritized, and the first bell prize is surely established when the special bell prize cannot be established in relation to the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 10 is won in the AT state ST5, the probability of winning the transfer of the additional period in the transfer lottery process (step S2203) of the additional period is higher than that of the other index values IV as described above. Further, when the index value IV = 10 is won in the AT state ST5, even if the transition winning of the additional period is not obtained, a positive judgment is made in step S2208 in the AT state processing (FIG. 44) at the start of the game. The addition process of the number of sets (step S2209) is surely executed in.

In a configuration where it is highly advantageous to win the index value IV = 10, when the index value IV = 10 is won in the AT state ST5 and the first and second ending flags are not set to "1". Is notified of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the special bell winning, which is not established when the other index value IV is won. That is, in the case of the AT state ST5, when the index value IV = 10 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) (step S2807: YES), the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 On condition that "1" is not set in both of (step S2808: NO), the stop order setting process for reverse push notification is executed (step S2809), and the reverse push notification command is sent to the effect side MPU 92. Transmit (step S2810).

FIG. 55A is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the reverse push notification is executed when the index value IV = 10 is won. When the index value IV = 10 is won in the AT state ST5 and the first and second ending flags are not set to "1", the reverse push notification command is transmitted to the directing MPU 92 in step S2810. As a result, in the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 55 (a1), the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary, and the display corresponding to the stop order is performed, and the left reel 32L is displayed as "white 7". The symbol, the middle reel 32M is indicated by the "white 7" symbol, and the right reel 32R is indicated by the "red 7" symbol. Further, by executing the stop order setting process for reverse push notification in step S2809, the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary in the combined display unit 66 as shown in FIG. 55 (a2). The display corresponding to the stop order is performed. Then, the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order according to the notification, and the "white 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol are stopped on the main line ML3. When the buttons 42 to 44 are stopped, a special bell prize is established on the main line ML3 as shown in FIG. 55 (a3).

Even if the middle reel 32M is stopped as the first stop, each stop is made so that the "white 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol are stopped on any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. When the buttons 42 to 44 are stopped, a special bell prize is established on any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. Further, even if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, the "white 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol are stopped on any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. If the stop buttons 42 to 44 are not stopped at the stop operation timing, the first bell winning is established.

On the other hand, in the situation where "1" is set in either the first ending flag or the second ending flag in the AT state ST5, there is a high possibility that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is already satisfied. At the same time, the production corresponding to the ending period has started. Under such a situation, even if an additional number of sets is actually generated by the control of the main MPU 72, the player is not substantially given a profit, so the index value IV = 10. If the special bell prize is established in the case of winning, the player may think that the index value IV, which has a low winning probability, has been unnecessarily won. Therefore, if the index value IV = 10 is won in the AT state ST5 and the first ending flag or the second ending flag is set to "1", the other index value IV is won. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning, which can also be established, is notified. That is, when the index value IV = 10 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the AT state ST5 (step S2807: YES), the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 On condition that "1" is set in (step S2808: YES), the stop order setting process for forward push notification is executed (step S2811), and the forward push notification command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. (Step S2812).

FIG. 55B is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the forward push notification is executed when the index value IV = 10 is won. If the index value IV = 10 is won in the AT state ST5 and the first ending flag or the second ending flag is set to "1", the forward push notification command is sent to the directing MPU 92 in step S2812. By transmitting the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 55 (b1), the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary is performed. Further, by executing the stop order setting process for forward push notification in step S2811, the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary in the combined display unit 66 as shown in FIG. 55 (b2). The display corresponding to the stop order is performed. Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the order according to the notification, the first bell winning is surely established on any of the main lines ML1 to ML5 as shown in FIG. 55 (b3). ..

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an effect control process during AT executed by the effect side MPU 92. The effect control process during AT is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the AT state ST5 or the end preparation state ST6.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the ending flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2901). The ending flag is a flag for the directing side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the situation is after receiving the first ending command or the second ending command from the main side MPU 72 in the current AT state ST5. When "1" is not set in the ending flag (step S2901: NO), the effect mode selection process is executed (step S2902). The content of the effect mode selection process (FIG. 48) has already been described. If the addition period is in progress (step S2903: YES), the effect control process during the addition period is executed (step S2904). The contents of the effect control process (FIG. 51) during the addition period are as described above.

When a negative determination is made in step S2903 or the process of step S2904 is executed, other control processes during AT are executed (step S2905). As other control processing during AT, for example, when the first addition command is received from the main MPU 72, the effect indicating that the number of games has been added at the time of transition to the addition period is the upper lamp 61 and the speaker. A process for being executed by the image display device 63 and the image display device 63 is executed. Further, for example, when the second addition command is received from the main MPU 72, an effect indicating that the number of sets of "3" has been given is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Perform the process to do so. Further, for example, when the third addition command is received from the main MPU 72, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 produce an effect indicating that the number of sets to be added this time has been given. Execute the process to be executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the first ending command or the second ending command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2906). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2906, "1" is set in the ending flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2907). After that, the information necessary for satisfying the ending condition is stored (step S2908). Specifically, when the ending command received this time is the first ending command, information on the number of games required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 included in the first ending command is satisfied, that is, Information corresponding to the difference in the value of the continuous game number counter 74c with respect to the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is read, and the read information is stored in the first ending condition storage area provided in the effect side RAM 94. If the ending command received this time is the second ending command, the total net increase in the total number of game media required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 included in the second ending command is satisfied is limited. Information, that is, information corresponding to the difference in the value of the total acquired number counter 74d with respect to the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2 is read, and the read information is stored in the second ending condition storage area provided in the effect side RAM 94. ..

After that, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the first ending condition storage area or the second ending condition storage area of the effect side RAM 94 corresponds to the satisfaction of the generation condition of the ending effect (step S2909). The ending effect is an effect executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 for a predetermined number of games before the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. When the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of generation reference games, which is less than the maximum number of games, that is, when the information stored in the first ending condition storage area is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games, the ending The condition for generating the effect is satisfied. Although the number of generation reference games is arbitrary, it is set to 1450 games in this slot machine 10. Therefore, the predetermined number of games is 50 games. Further, when the limited total net increase number of game media in the second section SC2 is equal to or more than the generation reference number number which is smaller than the upper limit net increase number, that is, the information stored in the second ending condition storage area is the predetermined number of sheets. In the following cases, the conditions for generating the ending effect are satisfied. Although the generation reference number is arbitrary, it is set to 2150 in this slot machine 10. Therefore, the predetermined number of sheets is 250.

When the condition for generating the ending effect is not satisfied (step S2909: NO), the data table of the ending confirmed effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2910). The data table of the ending final effect is a table in which various data for executing the ending final effect are set as the effect corresponding to the ending period. The production side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the data table of the ending confirmation effect, so that the ending confirmation effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. To do so.

FIG. 57A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the display contents of the ending confirmation effect executed by the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 57A, in the situation where the ending confirmation effect is being executed, the character image G11 corresponding to the ending confirmation effect is displayed on the image display device 63, and the ending confirmation effect is generated. The definite notification image G12 that makes the player recognizable is displayed. As a result, the player clearly recognizes that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is likely to be satisfied.

Returning to the explanation of the effect control process during AT (FIG. 56), when the condition for generating the ending effect is satisfied (step S2909: YES), "1" is set in the ending execution flag provided in the effect side RAM 94. (Step S2911). The ending execution flag is a flag for the effecting side MPU 92 to specify that the ending effect is being executed. Further, the data table of the ending effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2912). The ending effect data table is a table in which various data for executing the ending effect are set. The effect side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the data table of the ending effect, so that the ending effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. To do so.

FIG. 57B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the display contents of the ending effect executed by the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 57B, in the situation where the ending effect is being executed, the character image G13 corresponding to the ending effect is displayed on the image display device 63. As a result, the player clearly recognizes that the ending condition of the second section SC2 will be satisfied soon.

Returning to the description of the effect control process during AT (FIG. 56), when "1" is set in the ending flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2901: YES), "1" is set in the ending execution flag of the effect side RAM 94. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S2913). If "1" is not set in the ending execution flag (step S2913: NO), the ending correspondence information is updated on condition that the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2914: YES). Execute (step S2915).

As already explained, the production side RAM 94 has a first ending condition storage area used for specifying the number of games required for the production side MPU 92 to satisfy the ending condition, and is necessary for the production side RAM 94 to satisfy the ending condition. A second ending condition storage area is provided, which is used by the production side MPU 92 to specify the limited total net increase number of game media. As described above, the first ending condition storage area is required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 included in the first ending command is satisfied when the first ending command is received from the main MPU 72. Information on the number of games, that is, information corresponding to the difference in the value of the continuous game number counter 74c with respect to the maximum number of games in the second section SC2 is stored. Further, as described above, in the second ending condition storage area, when the second ending command is received from the main MPU 72, until the ending condition of the second section SC2 included in the second ending command is satisfied. Information on the limited total net increase number of game media required for the game medium, that is, information corresponding to the difference in the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d with respect to the upper limit net increase number of the second section SC2 is stored.

After receiving the first ending command or the second ending command, the ending correspondence information is updated in step S2915 until the second section initialization command is received next. In the update process, the effect side MPU 92 subtracts 1 from the value of the first ending condition storage area each time a winning result command is received from the main side MPU 72. In addition, every time a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72, if the player's game medium is increasing in this game, a value corresponding to the increased number of game media is set in the second ending condition storage area. It is subtracted from the value, and when the player's game medium is reduced in this game, the value corresponding to the reduced number of game media is added to the value of the second ending condition storage area.

After that, it is determined whether or not the ending correspondence information is the generation reference information (step S2916). Specifically, when the value of the first ending condition storage area of the effect side RAM 94 is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games, an affirmative determination is made in step S2916. That is, when the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of generation reference games, which is smaller than the maximum number of games by a predetermined number, a positive determination is made in step S2916. Further, when the value of the second ending condition storage area of the effect side RAM 94 is equal to or less than a predetermined number of sheets, an affirmative determination is made in step S2916. That is, when the limited total net increase number of game media in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the generation reference number number, which is less than the upper limit net increase number, a positive determination is made in step S2916.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2916, the ending execution flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2917), and the ending effect data table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2918). .. These processing contents are the same as in step S2911 and step S2912. As a result, the ending effect is started on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

When a negative determination is made in step S2906, when the process of step S2910 is executed, when the process of step S2912 is executed, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2913, when a negative determination is made in step S2914, step S2916 When a negative determination is made in, or when the process of step S2918 is executed, the end control process is executed (step S2919). FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the end control process.

First, it is determined whether or not the AT end command is received from the main MPU 72, or whether or not the ending condition is satisfied at the start of the game (step S3001). As described above, the AT end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 in step S2322 of the AT process (FIG. 45) in the main side MPU 72 when the AT state ST5 ends. Further, the information on the number of games required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 stored in the first ending condition storage area in step S2908 in the effect control process during AT (FIG. 56) is satisfied becomes "1". In this case, or in the effect control process during AT (FIG. 56), the limited total of game media required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 stored in the second ending condition storage area is satisfied in step S2908. When the information on the net increase number is 12 or less, it is determined that this game is the start of the game in which the ending condition is satisfied. Since the information in the first ending condition storage area is subtracted by 1 at the end of one game, if the game is started in a situation where the value of the first ending condition storage area is "1", the game is concerned. The ending condition is surely satisfied at the end of. Further, the information in the second ending condition storage area is updated at the end of one game, but the updated content varies depending on the mode in which the prize is established. Therefore, even if the game is started in a situation where the value of the second ending condition storage area is 12 or less, the ending condition may be satisfied in the game, or the ending condition may not be satisfied in the game. In some cases.

When the AT state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending condition, an affirmative determination is made in step S3001 triggered by receiving the AT end command from the main MPU 72. Further, when the AT state ST5 ends when the ending condition is satisfied, the value of the first ending condition storage area or the second ending condition storage area of the effect side RAM 94 becomes the game in which the ending condition is satisfied. An affirmative determination is made in step S3001 when the value corresponding to the above is reached.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the ending effect is being executed by determining whether or not the ending execution flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1". (Step S3002). When "1" is not set in the ending execution flag (step S3002: NO), the end data table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S3003). The end data table is a table in which various data for executing the AT end effect generated when the AT state ST5 ends without executing the ending effect are set. The effect side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the data table for the end, so that the AT end effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. To.

When "1" is set in the ending execution flag (step S3002: YES), the data table for the final effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S3004). The data table for the final effect is a table in which various data for executing the final effect generated when the AT state ST5 ends in the situation where the ending effect is being executed are set. The effect side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the data table for the final effect, so that the final effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. To. The final production is a production that has continuity with the ending production. When the AT state ST5 ends in a situation where the ending effect is being executed, the final effect having continuity with respect to the ending effect is executed following the ending effect. It is possible to provide a series of effects to the player.

When a negative determination is made in step S3001, it is determined whether or not a second section initialization command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3005). As already explained, the second section initialization command is issued when the end preparation state ST6 of one game, which occurs after the end of the AT state ST5, is completed, or when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. It is transmitted from the main MPU 72 in step S1916 in the second control process (FIG. 41).

When the second section initialization command is received (step S3005: YES), various clear processes are executed (step S3006). In the various clearing processes, various storage areas of the effect side RAM 94 used in the AT state ST5, such as the ending flag, the ending execution flag, the first ending condition storage area, and the second ending condition storage area, are cleared to "0".

After that, the data table of the effect waiting for transition is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S3007). The data table of the transition waiting effect is for executing the transition waiting effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended and that the state is waiting for the transition from the effect first section SC1 to the second section SC2. It is a table in which various data are set. The effecting side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the data table of the transition waiting effect, so that the transition waiting effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. To do so.

FIG. 57C is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the display contents of the transition waiting effect executed by the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 57 (c), in the situation where the transition waiting effect is being executed, the character image G14 corresponding to the transition waiting effect is displayed on the image display device 63, and it is shown that the AT state ST5 has ended. The character image of "END" is displayed as the end character image G15. As a result, the player clearly recognizes that the AT state ST5 has ended and that the situation is waiting for the transition to the second section SC2.

Next, the operation content of the slot machine 10 when the ending condition is satisfied in the AT state ST5 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 59. FIG. 59 (a) shows the period of the second section SC2, FIG. 59 (b) shows the period of the AT state ST5, and FIG. 59 (c) shows the remaining continuation game in the AT state ST5 at the main MPU 72. FIG. 59 (d) shows the situation in which the freeze period is executed, and FIG. 59 (e) shows that the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 has been added. The additional effect shown is shown, FIG. 59 (f) shows the period in which "1" is set in the ending flag of the effect side RAM 94, and FIG. 59 (g) shows the period in which the ending confirmation effect is executed. FIG. 59 (h) shows the period during which the ending effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the second section SC2 is started at the timing of t1 in the situation where the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1. Then, by repeatedly executing the game in the situation of the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1, the game state shifts to the AT state ST5 at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 59 (b).

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), the main MPU 72 executes an additional process for increasing the number of remaining sets in the AT state ST5. The addition process is the process of step S2213 executed by the addition winning (step S2212: YES) in the first addition lottery process (step S2211). As a result, the number of sets selected in the first additional lottery process is added. Further, when the addition process is executed, the third addition command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2214), so that the upper lamp 61 and the speaker are displayed at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 59 (e). The addition effect corresponding to this addition is executed on the 62 and the image display device 63.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), the main MPU 72 executes an additional process for increasing the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5. The addition process is the process of step S2205 executed by the transition winning of the addition period (step S2204: YES) in the transfer lottery process of the addition period (step S2203). In addition, the freeze counter setting process corresponding to the transition to the addition period is executed (step S2307). When "1" is not set in both the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main RAM 74, the freeze counter value becomes 1 or more, which is denied in step S317 in the normal processing (FIG. 13). It is judged. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59 (d), the freeze period occurs at the timing of t4. Further, when the addition period is started, the start command of the addition period is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2306). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59 (e), the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the speaker 62 are transmitted at the timing of t4. The image display device 63 executes an additional effect corresponding to the start of the additional period.

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), the main MPU 72 executes an additional process for increasing the number of remaining sets in the AT state ST5. The addition process is the process of step S2209 executed when the index value IV = 10 is won (step S2208: YES). As a result, the number of sets of "3" is added as the number of sets when the rare role is won. Further, when the index value IV = 10 is won, the stop order for the reverse push notification is notified. Specifically, in the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 55 (a1), the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary is performed, and "white 7" is displayed on the left reel 32L. The symbol, the middle reel 32M is indicated by the "white 7" symbol, and the right reel 32R is indicated by the "red 7" symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (a2), the combined display unit 66 displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary. Then, the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order according to the notification, and the "white 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol are stopped on the main line ML3. When the buttons 42 to 44 are stopped, a special bell prize is established on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 55 (a3). Further, when the addition process is executed, the second addition command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2210), so that the upper lamp 61 and the speaker are displayed at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 59 (e). The addition effect corresponding to this addition is executed on the 62 and the image display device 63.

By executing the addition process at the timing of t5, “1” is set in the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 59 (f) at the timing of t6. At the same time, "1" is set in the ending flag of the production side RAM 94. In this case, the conditions for generating the ending effect have not yet been satisfied. That is, the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is not more than 1450 games, which is the number of generation reference games, and the total net increase of the limited number of game media in the second section SC2 is 2150 or more, which is the generation reference number. It is not. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59 (g), the ending confirmation effect is started in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

After that, in the situation where the ending confirmation effect is being executed, the addition process is executed on the main MPU 72 at each of the timing of t7 and the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 59 (c). When the process of step S2205 is executed as the additional process, a value is added to the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74, and when any of the processes of step S2209, step S2213 and step S2503 is executed. Is added to the set count counter of the main RAM 74. However, since "1" is already set in the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74, even if the value of the AT continuation counter or the set count counter is added as described above, it is practical. It does not mean that the player has been given a profit. Further, even if the addition period shifts and the addition occurs during the addition period, since "1" is set in the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74, step S308 in the normal process (FIG. 13) Alternatively, an affirmative determination is made in step S316. Therefore, even if a value of 1 or more is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74, the freeze period does not occur.

Further, even if the index value IV = "10" is won, the stop order for the reverse push notification is not notified, and the stop order for the forward push notification is notified. Specifically, in the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 55 (b1), the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (b2), the combined display unit 66 displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary. Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the order according to the notification, the first bell winning is surely established on any of the main lines ML1 to ML5 as shown in FIG. 55 (b3). ..

Further, since "1" is set in the ending flag of the effect side RAM 94, the process of steps S2902 to S2912 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S2901 in the effect control process (FIG. 56) during AT. .. Therefore, even if the addition process is executed by the main MPU 72, the corresponding addition effect is not executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

After that, at the timing of t9, the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 becomes 1450 games or more, which is the number of generation reference games, or the total net increase of the limited number of game media in the second section SC2 is 2150, which is the generation reference number. When the number of sheets or more is increased, the condition for generating the ending effect is satisfied. Therefore, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIGS. 59 (g) and 59 (h), the ending finalizing effect is completed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and the ending effect is started.

After that, in the situation where the ending effect is being executed, the addition process is executed on the main MPU 72 at each of the timing of t10 and the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 59 (c). However, as in the situation where the ending confirmation effect is being executed, since "1" is already set in the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74, the AT continuation counter or the set count counter Even if the values are added, it does not mean that the player is substantially benefited. Further, the freeze period does not occur, and even if the index value IV = "10" is won, the stop order for the forward push notification is notified, and the additional effect is not executed.

After that, the ending condition is satisfied at the timing of t12 in the situation where the ending effect is being executed. When the ending condition is satisfied, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1 as shown in FIG. 59 (a), and the AT state ST5 ends as shown in FIG. 59 (b). The game state is ST1. Further, at the timing of t12, the ending effect ends as shown in FIG. 59 (h). In this case, the final effect is executed in the ending effect at the timing when the game in which the ending condition is satisfied is started. Further, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 59 (f), the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0", and the ending flag of the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0". ..

As described above, even if "1" is set in the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74, "1" is not set in both the first ending flag and the second ending flag. Similarly, a process for adding the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 and a process for adding the remaining number of sets in the AT state ST5 are executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the processing content of these additional processes depending on whether or not "1" is set in the first and second ending flags, so that the processing configuration of the main MPU 72 can be simplified. Will be.

On the other hand, when "1" is set in the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74, even if the value of the AT continuation counter or the set count counter is added, the player is substantially benefited. Is not granted. On the other hand, when "1" is set in the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74, the freeze period, the reverse push notification, and the addition effect associated with the execution of the addition process are not executed. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect as if the profit was given from being executed even though the profit is not substantially given to the player.

<About the first section SC1>
Next, the execution content of the effect in the first section SC1 and the execution content of the effect when shifting from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 will be described.

In the first control process (FIG. 40) of the game section executed in step S511 in the combination lottery process (FIG. 15), when any combination is won in the first section SC1 as described above (step S1801: NO). , Step S1802: YES), in step S1803, the process for shifting to the second section SC2 is executed. On the other hand, if none of the winning combinations are won in the first section SC1 (step S1801 and step S1802: NO), the non-transition correspondence process is executed in step S1810. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the non-migration correspondence process.

First, the value of the non-transition continuous counter provided in the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S3101). The non-transition continuous counter is a counter for specifying the number of games executed in the first section SC1 by the main MPU 72 without causing the transition to the second section SC2. After that, the setting suggestion lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the non-transition continuous counter and the set value set as the current target for use is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S3102). Then, the setting suggestion lottery process is executed (step S3103). In the setting suggestion lottery process, numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74, and the acquired numerical information is collated with the setting suggestion lottery table read out in step S3102. Select the setting suggestion command to be sent. After that, a setting suggestion command corresponding to the result of the setting suggestion lottery process is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3104).

FIG. 61 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a selection mode of the setting suggestion lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the non-transition continuous counter and the set value set as the current target for use, and FIG. 61 (b). ) Is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each setting suggestion lottery table.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), when the value of the non-transition continuous counter is "1" or "2", if the set value is "1" to "3", the first suggestion lottery table is used as the setting suggestion lottery table. Is selected, and if the set values are "4" to "6", the second suggestion lottery table is selected as the setting suggestion lottery table. When the value of the non-transition continuous counter is any of "3" to "5", if the set value is "1" or "2", the first suggestion lottery table is selected as the setting suggestion lottery table, and "3". If the setting value is "4", the second suggestion lottery table is selected as the setting suggestion lottery table, and if the setting value is "5" or "6", the third suggestion lottery table is selected as the setting suggestion lottery table. Will be done. When the value of the non-transition continuous counter is 6 or more, the setting suggestion lottery table is selected if the setting value is "1", and the setting suggestion lottery table is set if the setting value is "2". The table for 2 is selected, and if the setting value is "3", the table for setting 3 is selected as the setting suggestion lottery table, and if the setting value is "4", the table for setting 4 is selected as the setting suggestion lottery table. , If the setting value is "5", the setting suggestion lottery table is selected as the setting 5 table, and if the setting value is "6", the setting 6 table is selected as the setting suggestion lottery table.

In each setting suggestion lottery table, numerical information of a lottery counter to be won is set corresponding to a plurality of types of setting suggestion commands. In this case, as shown in FIG. 61B, the type of the setting suggestion command to be selected and the selection probability of the setting suggestion command to be selected differ depending on the type of the setting suggestion lottery table. Specifically, a small expectation command, a medium expectation command, a high expectation command, a low setting command, a medium setting command, and a high setting command are set as setting suggestion commands.

The low expectation command has a high setting value of "5" or a high setting value of "6" set as a target for use. It is a command to be executed in 63. FIG. 62A is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the effect corresponding to the low expectation command is executed by the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 62A, the character image G14 corresponding to the transition waiting effect is displayed on the image display device 63, and the character image of “END” is displayed as the end character image G15 indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended. In the displayed situation, the character image of "expectation?" Is displayed as the character image G21 corresponding to the low expectation degree effect.

In the medium expectation command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the effect indicating that the high setting value of the setting value of "5" or the setting value of "6" is set as the target of use is medium. This is a command to be executed by the image display device 63. In the image display device 63, the character image G14 corresponding to the transition waiting effect is displayed, and the character image of "END" is displayed as the end character image G15 indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended. A character image of "expected!" Is displayed as the character image G21 corresponding to the effect.

The high expectation command has a high setting value of "5" or a high setting value of "6" set as a target for use. The effect indicating that the high expectation is high is the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device. It is a command to be executed in 63. In the image display device 63, the character image G14 corresponding to the transition waiting effect is displayed, and the character image of "END" is displayed as the end character image G15 indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended. The character image of "hot!" Is displayed as the character image G21 corresponding to the effect.

The low setting command causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute an effect indicating that the setting value of "1" or the setting value of "2" is set as a target for use. Command for. In the image display device 63, in a situation where the character image G14 corresponding to the transition waiting effect is displayed and the character image of "END" is displayed as the end character image G15 indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended, the low setting range. A character image of "low setting !!" is displayed as the character image G21 corresponding to the effect.

The medium setting command causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute an effect indicating that the setting value of "3" or the setting value of "4" is set as a target for use. Command for. FIG. 62B is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the effect corresponding to the medium setting command is executed on the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 62B, the character image G14 corresponding to the transition waiting effect is displayed on the image display device 63, and the character image of “END” is displayed as the end character image G15 indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended. In the displayed situation, the character image of "intermediate setting !!" is displayed as the character image G22 corresponding to the medium setting range effect.

The high setting command causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute an effect indicating that the setting value of "5" or the setting value of "6" is set as a target for use. Command for. FIG. 62 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the effect corresponding to the high setting command is executed by the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 62 (c), the character image G14 corresponding to the transition waiting effect is displayed on the image display device 63, and the character image of “END” is displayed as the end character image G15 indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended. In the displayed situation, the character image of "high setting !!" is displayed as the character image G22 corresponding to the high setting value range effect.

When any of the low setting command, medium setting command, and high setting command is sent, the setting value set for use is the setting value in the low setting range ("1" or "2") and the medium setting. A small expectation command is executed while an effect indicating whether the set value of the range ("3" or "4") or the set value of the high setting range ("5" or "6") is executed is executed. , Whether or not the set value set as the target to be used is the set value (“5” or “6”) in the high setting range when either the medium expectation command or the high expectation command is transmitted. Although it is possible to predict whether or not the setting value is set as the target of use, the setting value in the low setting range ("1" or "2") and the setting value in the middle setting range ("3" or "4") ) And the set value (“5” or “6”) in the high setting range are not executed. Therefore, the player who wants to grasp the set value set as the target of use can use the low setting command and the medium setting command rather than executing the effect corresponding to the low expectation command, the medium expectation command, or the high expectation command. Alternatively, it is expected that the effect corresponding to the high setting command will be executed.

When the value of the non-transition continuous counter is "1" or "2" and the set value set for use is any of "1" to "3", or the value of the non-transition continuous counter is "". In the first suggestion lottery table selected when any of "3" to "5" and the set value set as the target of use is "1" or "2", there is a 70% probability that the value is small. The expectation command is selected, the medium expectation command is selected with a 20% probability, and the high expectation command is selected with a 10% probability, whereas the low setting command, medium setting command, and high setting command are selected. Not selected. When the value of the non-transition continuous counter is "1" or "2" and the set value set for use is any of "4" to "6", or the value of the non-transition continuous counter is "". In the second suggestion lottery table selected when any of "3" to "5" and the set value set as the target of use is "3" or "4", there is a 40% probability that the value is small. The expectation command is selected, the medium expectation command is selected with a 30% probability, and the high expectation command is selected with a 30% probability, whereas the low setting command, medium setting command, and high setting command are selected. Not selected. In the third suggestion lottery table selected when the value of the non-transition continuous counter is any of "3" to "5" and the set value set as the target of use is "5" or "6". There is a 10% chance that the low expectation command will be selected, a 20% chance that the medium expectation command will be selected, and a 70% chance that the high expectation command will be selected. Medium and high settings commands are not selected.

In the setting 1 table that is selected when the value of the non-transition continuous counter is 6 or more and the setting value set for use is "1", the small expectation command is selected with a probability of 40%. The medium expectation command is selected with a probability of 10%, and the low setting command is selected with a probability of 50%, whereas the high expectation command, the medium setting command, and the high setting command are not selected. In the setting 2 table that is selected when the value of the non-transition continuous counter is 6 or more and the setting value set for use is "2", the small expectation command is selected with a probability of 40%. The medium expectation command is selected with a 20% probability, and the low setting command is selected with a 40% probability, whereas the high expectation command, the medium setting command, and the high setting command are not selected. In the setting 3 table that is selected when the value of the non-transition continuous counter is 6 or more and the setting value set for use is "3", the medium expectation command is selected with a probability of 50%. The high expectation command is selected with a probability of 10%, and the medium setting command is selected with a probability of 40%, whereas the low expectation command, the low setting command, and the high setting command are not selected. In the setting 4 table that is selected when the value of the non-transition continuous counter is 6 or more and the setting value set for use is "4", the medium expectation command is selected with a probability of 40%. The high expectation command is selected with a probability of 10%, and the medium setting command is selected with a probability of 50%, whereas the low expectation command, the low setting command, and the high setting command are not selected. In the setting 5 table that is selected when the value of the non-transition continuous counter is 6 or more and the setting value set for use is "5", the medium expectation command is selected with a probability of 10%. The high expectation command is selected with a 50% probability, and the high setting command is selected with a 40% probability, whereas the low expectation command, the low setting command, and the medium setting command are not selected. In the setting 6 table that is selected when the value of the non-transition continuous counter is 6 or more and the setting value set for use is "6", the medium expectation command is selected with a probability of 10%. The high expectation command is selected with a probability of 40%, and the high setting command is selected with a probability of 50%, whereas the low expectation command, the low setting command, and the medium setting command are not selected.

With the above configuration, every time a game in which no combination is won is executed in the combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the first section SC1, the set value set as the target of use is in the high setting range. An effect that suggests a certain degree of expectation or an effect that clearly indicates a set range including a set value set as a target for use is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling that the game in which none of the winning combinations is won is executed in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the first section SC1.

When the value of the non-transition continuous counter is "1" or "2", either the first suggestion lottery table or the second suggestion lottery table is selected as the suggestion lottery table, whereas the non-transition continuous counter When the value of is any of "3" to "5", any one of the first suggestion lottery table, the second suggestion lottery table, and the third suggestion lottery table is selected as the suggestion lottery table. Therefore, the case where the value of the non-transition continuous counter is any one of "3" to "5" is set as the target of use than the case where the value of the non-transition continuous counter is "1" or "2". It becomes easy to predict the possibility that the set value is in the high set value range. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling that the game in which none of the winning combinations is won is repeated in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the first section SC1.

When the value of the non-transition continuous counter is 6 or more, the suggestion lottery table corresponding to the set value set as the target of use on a one-to-one basis is read, the setting suggestion lottery process is executed, and the setting suggestion command is executed. Of the low setting command, medium setting command, and high setting command, the command corresponding to the corresponding setting range can be selected as the transmission target. As a result, when a game in which no combination is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 15) is repeated for 6 or more games in the first section SC1, the set value set as the target of use is set. It is possible to give an opportunity to recognize whether it corresponds to the low setting range, the medium setting range, or the high setting range. Therefore, in the first section SC1, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling that the game in which none of the winning combinations is won is repeated in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), and it is set as a target for use. On the contrary, it is possible to make it a merit for a player who wants to grasp which set value range the set value is in.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the effect control process during non-AT executed by the effect side MPU 92. The effect control process during non-AT is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the normal game state ST1.

When any setting suggestion command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3201: YES), the display table corresponding to the received setting suggestion command is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S3202). The display table is provided with a one-to-one correspondence with the setting suggestion command, and by reading the display table, the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the setting suggestion command received this time is added to the transition waiting effect. Is executed by. As described above, the image display device 63 additionally displays the setting suggestion image corresponding to the setting suggestion command received this time in the situation where the image corresponding to the transition waiting effect is displayed.

When the setting suggestion command has not been received (step S3201: NO), it is determined whether or not the section transition command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3203). As described above, the section shift command is the main side in step S1809 when the process of shifting the game section from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 is executed in the first control process (FIG. 40) of the game section. It is transmitted from the MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92. Further, as described above, the section transition command corresponds to the information on the number of released games set in the release game number counter in step S1805 and the type of transition mode set in the transition mode storage area in step S1807. Contains information.

If the section transition command has not been received (step S3203: NO), other non-AT control processing is executed (step S3209). In the other non-AT control process, when a command different from the setting suggestion command and the section transition command is received, a process for executing the corresponding effect is executed.

When the section transition command is received (step S3203: YES), the information on the number of release games set in the section transition command is stored in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3204), and is set in the section transition command. Information corresponding to the type of transition mode is stored in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3205). After that, the transition suggestion lottery table corresponding to the combination of the number of released games and the transition mode is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S3206). Then, the transition suggestion lottery process is executed (step S3207). In the transition suggestion lottery process, numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the production side RAM 94, and the acquired numerical information is collated with the transition suggestion lottery table read out in step S3206. Select the transition image to be displayed. After that, the data table for transition suggestion corresponding to the result of the transition suggestion lottery process is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S3208). By executing the display control of the image display device 63 according to the data table for the transition suggestion, the transition image corresponding to the result of the transition suggestion lottery process is displayed on the image display device 63.

FIG. 64 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the selection mode of the transition suggestion lottery table corresponding to the combination of the game number range of the number of released games and the type of transition mode, and FIG. 64 (b) is each transition suggestion lottery. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of a table.

As described above, the number of released games is any one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games and 800 games. In this case, 600 games, 700 games and 800 games correspond to the first range, 300 games, 400 games and 500 games correspond to the second range, and 50 games, 100 games and 200 games correspond to the third range. do. Since the smaller the number of released games is, the more advantageous the player is, the second range is more advantageous to the player than the first range, and the third range is more advantageous to the player than the second range. be. Further, as described above, the second transition mode is more advantageous to the player than the first transition mode, and the third transition mode is more advantageous to the player than the second transition mode.

As shown in FIG. 64 (a), when the number of released games is in the first range, the first lottery table is selected as the transition suggestion lottery table in the first transition mode or the second transition mode, and in the third transition mode. If so, the second lottery table is selected as the transition suggestion lottery table. When the number of released games is in the second range, the first lottery table is selected as the transition suggestion lottery table in the first transition mode, and the second lottery table is selected as the transition suggestion lottery table in the second transition mode. , In the third transition mode, the third lottery table is selected as the transition suggestion lottery table. When the number of released games is in the third range, the second lottery table is selected as the transition suggestion lottery table in the first transition mode, and the third lottery table is selected as the transition suggestion lottery table in the second transition mode. , In the third transition mode, the fourth lottery table is selected as the transition suggestion lottery table.

In each transition suggestion lottery table, numerical information of a lottery counter that wins a prize corresponding to a plurality of types of transition images is set. In this case, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the type of the transition image to be selected and the selection probability of the transition image to be selected differ depending on the type of the transition suggestion lottery table. Specifically, a first transition image, a second transition image, and a third transition image are set as the transition images.

FIG. 65A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first transition image displayed on the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the first transition image, the image display device 63 displays the character image G31 indicating that the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred, and corresponds to the first transition image. A "normal" character image is displayed as the first transition character image G32. As a result, the player recognizes that the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred, and that the content of the combination of the number of released games and the transition mode is an advantageous content and the degree of expectation is low.

FIG. 65B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second transition image displayed on the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the second transition image, the image display device 63 displays the character image G31 indicating that the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred, and corresponds to the second transition image. A character image of "expected" is displayed as the second transition character image G33. As a result, the player recognizes that the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred, and that the expectation that the combination of the number of released games and the transition mode is advantageous is moderate.

FIG. 65 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the third transition image displayed on the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the third transition image, the image display device 63 displays the character image G31 indicating that the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred, and corresponds to the third transition image. A "hot" character image is displayed as the third transition character image G34. As a result, the player recognizes that the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred, and that the content of the combination of the number of released games and the transition mode is highly expected to be advantageous.

When the number of released games is the first range and the type of the transition mode is the first transition mode or the second transition mode, or when the number of released games is the second range and the type of the transition mode is the first transition mode. In the first lottery table selected in the case, the first transition image is selected with a probability of 90%, and the second transition image is selected with a probability of 10%. When the number of unlocked games is in the first range and the type of transition mode is the third transition mode, when the number of unlocked games is in the second range and the type of transition mode is the second transition mode, or the number of unlocked games In the second lottery table selected when is in the third range and the type of transition mode is the first transition mode, the first transition image is selected with a probability of 50% and the second with a probability of 40%. A transition image is selected and there is a 10% chance that a third transition image will be selected. Selected when the number of unlocked games is in the second range and the type of transition mode is the third transition mode, or when the number of unlocked games is in the third range and the type of transition mode is the second transition mode. In the third lottery table, the first transition image is selected with a probability of 10%, the second transition image is selected with a probability of 20%, and the third transition image is selected with a probability of 70%. In the fourth lottery table selected when the number of unlocked games is in the third range and the type of transition mode is the third transition mode, the second transition image is selected with a probability of 10%, and the probability of 90%. The third transition image is selected with.

With the above configuration, the number of released games and the transition mode in the second section SC2 this time can be determined by using the transition image displayed on the image display device 63 when shifting from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2. It is possible to make the player predict. In particular, when the third transition image is displayed, there is a high probability that the transition mode with a short number of release games and a high expectation of transition to the AT state ST5 is selected, so that the player's attention to the transition image is high. Can be increased.

Next, the execution contents of the effect from the first section SC1 to the transition to the second section SC2 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 66. FIG. 66 (a) shows the execution period of one game, FIG. 66 (b) shows the period of the second section SC2, FIG. 66 (c) shows the period of the AT state ST5, and FIG. 66 (d) shows. Indicates the period during which the transition waiting effect is executed, FIG. 66 (e) shows the period during which the setting suggestion effect is executed, and FIG. 66 (f) shows the period during which the transition effect is executed.

In the situation where the second section SC2 is shown in FIG. 66 (b) and the AT state is ST5 as shown in FIG. 66 (c), the timing of t1 to the timing of t2 is shown as shown in FIG. 66 (a). One game is executed. When the one game is executed, the end condition of the AT state ST5 is satisfied. Therefore, at the timing of t2, the AT state ST5 ends and the end preparation state ST6 is set as shown in FIG. 66 (c). Further, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the next one game is executed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, but as shown in FIG. 66 (b) at the timing of t4 which is the end timing of the game. The second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1. At the timing of t4, the end preparation state ends and the normal game state ST1 is set.

Since the second section SC2 ends at the timing of t4 and becomes the first section SC1 as described above, the transition waiting effect is started at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 66 (d). In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying an image corresponding to the transition waiting effect as shown in FIG. 57 (c).

After that, in the situation of the first section SC1, as shown in FIG. 66A, the timing of t5 to the timing of t6, the timing of t7 to the timing of t8, the timing of t9 to the timing of t10, and the timing of t11 to t12. One game is executed at each of the timing, the timing of t13 to the timing of t14, and the timing of t15 to the timing of t16. In this case, in each of these games, none of the winning combinations is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15). Therefore, the transition to the second section SC2 triggered by each of these games does not occur and is maintained in the first section SC1. Since it is maintained in the first section SC1, as shown in FIG. 66 (e), the timing of t5 to the timing of t6, the timing of t7 to the timing of t8, the timing of t9 to the timing of t10, the timing of t11 to the timing of t12. , T13 timing to t14 timing, and t15 timing to t16 timing, respectively, the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the setting suggestion effect, as described above, the image corresponding to the setting suggestion is additionally displayed in the situation where the image corresponding to the transition waiting effect is displayed on the image display device 63. Further, as the number of times the game is executed that does not trigger the transition to the second section SC2 in the first section SC1 increases, the accuracy of setting value suggestion in the setting suggestion effect increases.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66A, one new game is executed from the timing of t17 to the timing of t18. In the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) executed at the start of the game, one of the winning combinations is won. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the game section shifts from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 at the timing of t17. Further, as shown in FIGS. 66 (d) and 66 (f), the transition waiting effect ends and the transition effect starts. In the transition effect, the transition image corresponding to the combination of the number of released games and the transition mode determined at the time of the transition to the second section SC2 is displayed on the image display device 63.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66A, one new game is executed from the timing of t19 to the timing of t20. As shown in FIG. 66 (f), the transition effect ends at the timing of t19, which is the start of the game. In this case, the display of the transition image on the image display device 63 ends.

<About external output>
Next, a configuration relating to an external output of an AT signal indicating that the AT state is ST5 will be described.

The slot machine 10 is provided with an external output terminal plate 78 (see FIG. 10). The external output terminal plate 78 is provided with an output terminal for an AT signal, and the output terminal for the AT signal is electrically connected to the main MPU 72 and is a game hole provided outside the slot machine 10. It is electrically connected to the management computer of.

The output terminal for the AT signal and the main MPU 72 are electrically connected through a predetermined signal path, and the HI level AT signal is transmitted from the main MPU 72 through the predetermined signal path to output the AT signal. The HI level AT signal is transmitted to the management computer of the game hall through the terminal. The details will be described later, but when the AT state ST5 is started, the AT signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Further, when one set is continued in the AT state ST5, the AT signal is once lowered from the HI level to the LOW level, and then raised again from the LOW level to the HI level. Further, when the AT state ST5 ends, the AT signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level. The game hall management computer can measure the number of times the AT state ST5 is set by measuring the number of times the AT signal externally output from the slot machine 10 rises from the LOW level to the HI level.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an external output setting process executed by the main MPU 72. The external output setting process includes a combination lottery process (FIG. 15), a reel control process (FIG. 23), a corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29), and a medium addition process (step S315) in the normal process (FIG. 13). It is executed in step S318, which is the timing after the execution.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first output start flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3301). As described above, when the process for shifting to the AT state ST5 is executed in the normal process (FIG. 43) executed in step S1004 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29), the first step is step S2118. 1 "1" is set in the output start flag. When "1" is set in the first output start flag (step S3301: YES), after clearing the first output start flag "0" (step S3302), the AT signal ON setting process is executed (step S3301: YES). Step S3303). In the AT signal ON setting process, the output state of the AT signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. As a result, the HI level AT signal is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the output terminal for the AT signal through the predetermined signal path, and the HI level AT signal is externally output to the management computer of the game hall through the output terminal for the AT signal. NS.

When "1" is not set in the first output start flag (step S3301: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second output start flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3304). As described above, when the process for continuing one set of the AT state ST5 is executed in the AT process (FIG. 45) executed in step S1005 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29), step S2316 The second output start flag is set to "1". Further, in step S2317, the AT signal OFF setting process is executed. In the AT signal OFF setting process, the output state of the AT signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level. As a result, the LOW level AT signal is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the output terminal for the AT signal through the predetermined signal path, and the LOW level AT signal is externally output to the management computer of the game hall through the output terminal for the AT signal. NS. Further, in step S2318, the OFF continuation counter setting process is executed. In the setting process, numerical information corresponding to the OFF continuation period is set in the OFF continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74. The OFF continuation counter is a counter for specifying the period for maintaining the AT signal at the LOW level by the main MPU 72 when one set of the AT state ST5 is continued. The OFF duration is set to 200 milliseconds, but is optional. When the value of the OFF continuation counter is 1 or more, the value of the OFF continuation counter is decremented by 1 in the timer subtraction process (step S208) every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is started. Further, the output state of the AT signal is not limited to the configuration in which the output state is switched between the LOW level and the HI level, and the output state of the AT signal may be switched between the output state and the non-output state.

When "1" is set in the second output start flag (step S3304: YES), the value of the OFF continuation counter of the main RAM 74 becomes higher after clearing the second output start flag "0" (step S3305). By determining whether or not it is "0", whether the OFF continuation period (specifically, 200 milliseconds) set in the OFF continuation counter in step S2318 of the AT process (FIG. 45) has elapsed. Whether or not it is determined (step S3306). When the value of the OFF continuation counter is 1 or more (step S3306: NO), the process of step S3306 is repeatedly executed. When the value of the OFF continuation counter is "0" (step S3306: YES), the AT signal ON setting process is executed (step S3307). In the AT signal ON setting process, the output state of the AT signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. As a result, the HI level AT signal is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the output terminal for the AT signal through the predetermined signal path, and the HI level AT signal is externally output to the management computer of the game hall through the output terminal for the AT signal. NS.

When "1" is not set in the second output start flag (step S3304: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the external output end flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3308). As described above, when the process for terminating the AT state ST5 is executed in the AT process (FIG. 45) executed in step S1005 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 29), the external process is performed in step S2323. "1" is set in the output end flag. Further, although not shown, when it is determined that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied in the second control process (FIG. 41) of the game section (step S1906: YES or step S1913: YES), the external output is also obtained. "1" is set in the end flag.

When "1" is set in the external output end flag (step S3308: YES), after clearing the external output end flag "0" (step S3309), the AT signal OFF setting process is executed (step S3310). ). In the AT signal OFF setting process, the output state of the AT signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level. As a result, the LOW level AT signal is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the output terminal for the AT signal through the predetermined signal path, and the LOW level AT signal is externally output to the management computer of the game hall through the output terminal for the AT signal. NS.

Next, how the output level of the AT signal is switched will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 68. FIG. 68 (a) shows the execution period of one game, FIG. 68 (b) shows the timing when one set of the AT state ST5 ends, and FIG. 68 (c) shows the start of a new set of the AT state ST5. FIG. 68 (d) shows the period during which the ending confirmation effect is executed, and FIG. 68 (e) shows the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotating. The period is shown, FIG. 68 (f) shows the period during which the medal payout is executed, FIG. 68 (g) shows the output state of the AT signal, and FIG. 68 (h) shows the OFF continuation counter of the main RAM 74. Indicates the state.

First, a case where one set of the AT state ST5 is continued in a situation where the ending final effect and the ending effect are not executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a), the game is started at the timing of t1, and as shown in FIG. 68 (e), the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started at the timing of t1. Further, since the game this time is started in the AT state ST5, the AT signal is at the HI level as shown in FIG. 68 (g).

After that, at the timing of t2, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped as shown in FIG. 68 (e). In this case, since the value of the AT continuation counter after subtraction of 1 in the AT process (FIG. 45) becomes “0”, one set of the AT state ST5 this time is completed as shown in FIG. 68 (b). However, when the value of the set count counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, the process for starting a new set in the AT state ST5 is executed. When the process for starting the one set is executed, the AT continuation command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 in step S2315. Therefore, at the timing of t2, the set continuation effect is started as shown in FIG. 68 (c). Further, by executing the AT signal OFF setting process in step S2317, the output state of the AT signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 68 (g). Further, by executing the setting process of the OFF continuation counter in step S2318, the OFF continuation counter corresponds to the OFF continuation period (specifically, 200 milliseconds) at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 68 (h). Information to be set. In addition, when a prize corresponding to the granting of the game medium is established in this game and the number of virtual medals stored and stored reaches the upper limit stored storage number (specifically, "50"), t2 At the timing of, the payout of medals by the hopper device 53 is started as shown in FIG. 68 (f).

Here, in the normal process (FIG. 13), the medium addition process (step S315) is executed after the corresponding process (FIG. 29) at the end of the game including the AT process (FIG. 45) is executed, so that the AT signal After the output state of is switched from the HI level to the LOW level and the information corresponding to the OFF continuation period (specifically, 200 milliseconds) is set in the OFF continuation counter of the main RAM 74, the medal is paid out by the hopper device 53. Is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68 (f), the measurement of the OFF continuation period proceeds during the period in which the medal payout by the hopper device 53 is executed.

After that, at the timing of t3, the payout of medals by the hopper device 53 is completed as shown in FIG. 68 (f). In this case, the external output setting process (FIG. 67) is executed on condition that the freeze period is not set in the normal process (FIG. 13). In the external output setting process, as described above, when "1" is set in the second output start flag of the main RAM 74 and the value of the OFF continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, step S3306 is performed. stand by. Therefore, the output state of the AT signal is maintained at the LOW level until the remaining period of the OFF duration period elapses.

After that, at the timing of t4, the value of the OFF continuation counter of the main RAM 74 becomes “0” as shown in FIG. 68 (h). That is, the measurement of the OFF duration is completed. Therefore, at the timing of t4, the output state of the AT signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 68 (g). Further, at the timing of t4, this game ends as shown in FIG. 68 (a).

Next, a case where one set of the AT state ST5 is continued in a situation where the ending confirmation effect is being executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a), the game is started at the timing of t5, and as shown in FIG. 68 (e), the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started at the timing of t5. Further, since the game this time is started in the AT state ST5, the AT signal is at the HI level as shown in FIG. 68 (g).

After that, at the timing of t6, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped as shown in FIG. 68 (e). In this case, since the value of the AT continuation counter after subtraction of 1 in the AT process (FIG. 45) becomes “0”, one set of the AT state ST5 this time is completed as shown in FIG. 68 (b). However, when the value of the set count counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, the process for starting a new set in the AT state ST5 is executed. When the process for starting the one set is executed, the AT continuation command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 in step S2315, but the ending confirmation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 68 (d). Due to the situation, the set continuation effect is not executed as shown in FIG. 68 (c). As a result, in the control of the main MPU 72, even if a new set of the AT state ST5 is continued, the ending confirmation effect is continued without executing the corresponding effect, so that the player is in the AT state. It is not recognized that one set of ST5 has been completed and a new set has been continued.

Further, by executing the AT signal OFF setting process in step S2317, the output state of the AT signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 68 (g). Further, by executing the setting process of the OFF continuation counter in step S2318, the OFF continuation counter corresponds to the OFF continuation period (specifically, 200 milliseconds) at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 68 (h). Information to be set. In addition, when a prize corresponding to the granting of the game medium is established in this game and the number of virtual medals stored and stored reaches the upper limit stored storage number (specifically, "50"), t6 At the timing of, the payout of medals by the hopper device 53 is started as shown in FIG. 68 (f).

As described above, in the normal process (FIG. 13), the medium addition process (step S315) is executed after the corresponding process (FIG. 29) at the end of the game including the AT process (FIG. 45) is executed, so that the AT signal After the output state of is switched from the HI level to the LOW level and the information corresponding to the OFF continuation period (specifically, 200 milliseconds) is set in the OFF continuation counter of the main RAM 74, the medal is paid out by the hopper device 53. Is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68 (f), the measurement of the OFF continuation period proceeds during the period in which the medal payout by the hopper device 53 is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (h), the value of the OFF continuation counter of the main RAM 74 becomes "" at the timing of t7, which is the situation where the hopper device 53 continues to pay out medals as shown in FIG. 68 (f). It becomes "0". That is, the measurement of the OFF duration is completed. However, since the medium addition process (step S315) is still executed in the normal process (FIG. 13) and the external output setting process (FIG. 67) is not executed, the AT signal is as shown in FIG. 68 (g). Maintained at LOW level.

After that, at the timing of t8, the payout of medals by the hopper device 53 is completed as shown in FIG. 68 (f). In this case, since the measurement of the OFF continuation period has already been completed, the output state of the AT signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 68 (g) at the timing of t8. Further, at the timing of t8, this game ends as shown in FIG. 68 (a).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the ending condition of the second section SC2 can be satisfied in the AT state ST5 based on the values of the AT continuation counter and the set count counter in the AT state ST5, the first ending flag or the second ending of the main RAM 74 "1" is set in the flag. Then, when "1" is set in the first ending flag or the second ending flag, the ending confirmation effect or the ending effect is executed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the ending condition of the second section SC2 can be satisfied in the AT state ST5. In this case, even if "1" is set in the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74, "1" is not set in both the first ending flag and the second ending flag. Similar to the situation, the process for adding the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 and the process for adding the remaining number of sets in the AT state ST5 are executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the processing content of these additional processes depending on whether or not "1" is set in the first and second ending flags, so that the processing configuration of the main MPU 72 can be simplified. Will be.

On the other hand, when "1" is set in the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74, even if the value of the AT continuation counter or the set count counter is added, the player is substantially benefited. Is not granted. On the other hand, when "1" is set in the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74, the freeze period, the reverse push notification, and the addition effect associated with the execution of the addition process are not executed. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect as if the profit was given from being executed even though the profit is not substantially given to the player.

In particular, since the freeze period does not occur, it is possible to prevent the digestion efficiency of the game from being lowered due to the execution of the additional processing that is not substantially beneficial to the player.

When "1" is set in the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74, even if one set of the AT state ST5 ends and a new set is continued, the corresponding effect is executed. Not done. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the ending final effect or the ending effect.

When the AT state ST5 is completed, the image of the transition waiting effect is displayed on the image display device 63, so that the player can clearly recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended. In this case, the image of the transition waiting effect is continued until a new transition to the second section SC2 occurs. As a result, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the situation is after the end of the AT state ST5 and before the transition to the second section SC2 again by using the image of the transition waiting effect. At the same time, since the image of the transition waiting effect is only continuously displayed, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while reducing the processing load.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started and the first section SC1 is reached based on the execution of the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105), an image is displayed. The image of the transition waiting effect is not displayed on the device 63. As a result, in the case of the first section SC1, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize whether or not it is the situation after the end of the AT state ST5.

Since the transition to the second section SC2 occurs based on winning any of the combinations in the combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the first section SC1, the combination lottery process is triggered by the transition to the second section SC2. It becomes possible to associate with the result of (FIG. 15). Further, in the configuration, if a game in which no combination is won is repeated in the combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the first section SC1, the first section SC1 will continue. In the first section SC1 after the end of the AT state ST5, the image display device 63 continues to display the image of the transition waiting effect, so that the player clearly recognizes that the first section SC1 is continuing. It becomes possible.

Every time a game in which no combination is won is executed in the combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the first section SC1, it suggests the degree of expectation that the set value set as the target of use is in the high setting range. An effect or an effect that specifies the set range including the set value set as the target of use is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling that the game in which none of the winning combinations is won is executed in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the first section SC1.

When the value of the non-transition continuous counter is "1" or "2", either the first suggestion lottery table or the second suggestion lottery table is selected as the suggestion lottery table, whereas the non-transition continuous counter When the value of is any of "3" to "5", any one of the first suggestion lottery table, the second suggestion lottery table, and the third suggestion lottery table is selected as the suggestion lottery table. Therefore, the case where the value of the non-transition continuous counter is any one of "3" to "5" is set as the target of use than the case where the value of the non-transition continuous counter is "1" or "2". It becomes easy to predict the possibility that the set value is in the high set value range. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling that the game in which none of the winning combinations is won is repeated in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the first section SC1.

When the value of the non-transition continuous counter is 6 or more, the suggestion lottery table corresponding to the set value set as the target of use on a one-to-one basis is read, the setting suggestion lottery process is executed, and the setting suggestion command is executed. Of the low setting command, medium setting command, and high setting command, the command corresponding to the corresponding setting range can be selected as the transmission target. As a result, when a game in which no combination is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 15) is repeated for 6 or more games in the first section SC1, the set value set as the target of use is set. It is possible to give an opportunity to recognize whether it corresponds to the low setting range, the medium setting range, or the high setting range. Therefore, in the first section SC1, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling that the game in which none of the winning combinations is won is repeated in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), and it is set as a target for use. On the contrary, it is possible to make it a merit for a player who wants to grasp which set value range the set value is in.

When the transition from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 occurs, the number of released games and the type of transition mode in the second section SC2 are determined, so that the determined content is advantageous for the player. We will pay attention to whether or not there is. In this case, the effect content of the transition effect executed when the transition to the second section SC2 is performed is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the advantage of the second section SC2. As a result, it is possible to suggest the advantage of the second section SC2 to the player by using the transition effect for making the player recognize that the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the transition effect.

When the notification indicating that the number of sets has been added is executed during the addition period, the speaker 62 outputs an addition-corresponding sound with a relatively loud sound in order to enhance the effect of the effect. In this case, if the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified and the additional corresponding voice is suddenly output, the player who is surprised at it makes a mistake in the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. There is a risk that it will end up. Therefore, if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are notified of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R during the addition period and the number of sets is added and the reels are won, a freeze period is basically generated by the control of the main MPU 72. As a result, even if the player is surprised at the additional voice, the control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with respect to the operation of the player is blocked at that timing, so that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be mistaken. The sex is reduced.

The output of the additional voice is completed within the range in which the freeze period is executed. As a result, it is possible to reliably invalidate the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in the situation where the additional sound is output.

In a configuration in which the add-on voice is generated at the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, at the first stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, or at the second stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the add-on voice is provided. When is generated at the start of the rotation, the intermediate freeze period is generated at the start of the rotation, and when the additional voice is generated at the first stop, the intermediate freeze period is generated at the first stop, and the additional voice is generated. Occurs at the time of the second stop, the midway freeze period occurs at the time of the second stop. That is, since the halfway freeze period is started immediately before the additional corresponding sound is output, it is possible to prevent an excessive situation in which the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are invalidated.

In a situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified, the number of sets may be added and the winning may be won. Even if the player is surprised by the output of the additional sound in such a situation, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is arbitrary, so the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be wrong. There is no. Therefore, there is no intermediate freeze period in this situation. This makes it possible to prevent an excessive situation in which the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are invalidated.

The type of production mode corresponding to the corresponding image displayed in the foreground in the selection target mode image G2 at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated and the game start trigger occurs is the type of production mode that occurs during this addition period. In this configuration, it is misunderstood that the type of production mode corresponding to the corresponding image to be selected is determined at that timing by inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 45 or setting a bet by operating the credit insertion button 47. There is a risk that some players will appear. Since the player misunderstands that the type of production mode has been decided at the time of setting the bet, the subsequent operation timing of the start lever 41 selects a type of production mode different from the desired type of production mode. There is a risk that the timing will be the target. In particular, when the bet is set at a short timing when the remaining switching period for which the desired type of effect mode is selected is set and the start lever 41 is operated immediately, a type different from the desired type of effect mode is used. There is a high possibility that the production mode will be decided. On the other hand, at the timing when the bet is set, the remaining switching period for the type of effect mode selected at that time is reset to the initial value. As a result, even if the player misunderstands that the bet setting is the operation for determining the type of the effect mode, it is possible to determine the desired type of effect mode as the effect mode for the current addition period. It becomes.

When the bet is set, the remaining switching period for the type of production mode that is being selected at that time is reset to the initial value, so that the fixed period for extension to the remaining switching period can be set. Compared with the configuration of addition, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while suppressing the increase of the information stored in advance.

By displaying the switching period image G3 indicating the remaining switching period, it becomes easier for the player to predict the timing at which the effect mode to be selected is switched. In this case, when the remaining switching period is reset to the initial value, the display content of the switching period image G3 is also changed according to the reset. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the remaining switching period has been reset to the initial value.

When the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36, the process of setting the validity period flags 102a to 102c to "1" is performed individually for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Therefore, the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated is different for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be started earlier than the configuration in which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at the same time.

In a situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified, the stop operation for the left reel 32L is generally performed first. Further, when the stop operation for the left reel 32L is performed first in the situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified, the left stop button 42 is operated at the timing when the cherry winning is not missed. .. As shown in the explanatory diagram for explaining the symbol arrangement of FIG. 28, when the stop operation for the left reel 32L is performed so that the cherry winning is not missed, the maximum number of slips is 4, so the follow range. The third "white 7" symbol to the thirteenth "watermelon" symbol shown as can reach the lower stage of the left reel 32L. In the configuration in which the follow range is set in this way, the initial rotation position at which the corresponding reel index sensor 36 detects the sensor cut van 37 in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is the reel 32L corresponding to the 15th symbol. , 32M, 32R is a rotation position existing at the lower position. In the left reel 32L, this initial rotation position is the non-follow range (0th "watermelon" symbol ~ 2nd "bell" symbol and 14th "watermelon" symbol ~ which is a range other than the follow range and the follow range. Of the boundary with the 20th "bell" symbol), the rotation position is one symbol ahead of the boundary on the downstream side in the rotation direction of the left reel 32L. The initial rotation position of the left reel 32L is a rotation position one symbol ahead of the boundary on the downstream side in the rotation direction of the left reel 32L between the follow range and the non-follow range. As a result, when the left stop button 42 is operated with respect to the left reel 32L so that any of the symbols included in the follow range stops at the lower position of the left reel 32L, at the start of the next game. The sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 corresponding to the left reel 32L and the operation of the left stop button 42 is enabled at an early stage after the acceleration of the left reel 32L is completed and the rotation becomes constant speed. It will be. Then, when the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 after the acceleration is completed, the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is individually enabled, and the left reel is used. Since the initial rotation position of the 32L is set as described above, the operation of the left stop button 42 on the left reel 32L can be effectively enabled at an early stage in the situation where the stop operation on the left reel 32L is performed first. It will be possible.

When one set is continued in the AT state ST5, the output state of the AT signal is once switched from the HI level to the LOW level, and then when the OFF duration period elapses, the LOW level is switched to the HI level again. In this case, the process of switching the output state of the AT signal from the HI level to the LOW level and the process of starting the measurement of the OFF duration are after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed, and the medium addition process (step S315). ) Is started before it is executed. Then, when the measurement of the OFF continuation period is completed after the medium application process (step S315) is completed, the output state of the AT signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. As a result, it is possible to measure the OFF duration including the period during which the medal is paid out by the hopper device 53, so that the period for waiting for the progress of the process until the OFF duration elapses is shortened. It becomes possible to do.

The execution period of the medium imparting process (step S315) may be equal to or longer than the OFF continuation period. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which the processing waiting period until the OFF continuation period elapses does not substantially occur.

When a special replay prize is established in the first half RT state, each light emitting unit 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 is lit even in a situation where a new game can be started without setting a new bet. Turns off from. Then, when the credit insertion button 47 is operated, the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 are sequentially turned from the off state to the lit state even in a situation where a new bet setting is not made. .. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol in any of the main lines ML1 to ML5. It will be a special replay prize. Further, in order to establish the special replay prize, it is necessary to stop the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R as the first stop, and the left stop button 42 is operated at a predetermined timing with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L. There is a need. Therefore, when the special replay prize is established, the player recognizes that the replay prize is actually established but the so-called replay is removed. In this case, if the special replay prize is established as described above, the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 are temporarily switched from the lit state to the extinguished state, and then the credit insertion button 47 is operated. By configuring the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 to be sequentially switched from the off state to the on state, so-called replay removal is performed even in a situation where a replay prize is actually established. It is possible to make the player recognize the bed.

When the special replay prize is established in the first half RT state, not only the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 are turned off, but also the credit insertion button 47 is switched from the off state to the lighting state. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the so-called replay removal has been performed even in the situation where the replay winning is actually established.

When the special replay prize is established in the first half RT state and the credit insertion button 47 is operated after that, the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 are sequentially switched from the off state to the on state. Not only is it replaced, but a bet sound is output from the speaker 62. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the so-called replay removal has been performed even in the situation where the replay winning is actually established.

If the special replay prize is established in the first half RT state and the start lever 41 is operated without operating the credit insertion button 47, the production side bet display unit 69 is used when the game is started by the operation. All of the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the above are simultaneously switched from the off state to the on state. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the so-called replay removal has been performed even in the situation where the replay prize is actually established as described above, but when the game is started, the production side It is possible to make all the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the bet display unit 69 in the lit state.

In the configuration in which the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 are turned off when the special replay prize is established in the first half RT state, the light emitting units 64a to 64c of the main side bet display unit 64 are in the lighting state. Is maintained at. As a result, even if the situation is after the special replay prize is established in the first half RT state, the manager of the game hall can bet on the game medium by checking the main bet display unit 64. It is possible to clearly identify whether or not there is a bed.

When either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, even if the winning is performed with any of the index values IV = 18 to 21, the BB winning data or the RB winning is triggered by the winning. Since the processing by the program is set so that the data is not newly stored in the main RAM 74, the winning combination lottery table depends on whether either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. It is possible to prevent the BB winning data and the RB winning data from being cumulatively stored in the main RAM 74 without changing the type of. By not changing the type of the winning combination lottery table depending on whether or not either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the winning combination lottery according to the presence or absence of the winning data is stored. Since it is not necessary to prepare a table, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for storing the winning combination lottery table.

When either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, even if the winning is performed with any of the index values IV = 18 to 21, the BB winning data or the RB winning is triggered by the winning. Even if the data is not newly stored in the main RAM 74, if either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 and the index value IV = 18 or 20 is won. The cherry winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. As a result, the cherry winning data is selectively stored, and the probability that the cherry winning data is stored varies depending on whether or not either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing content of the stepping motor control process executed by the main MPU 72 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a stepping motor control process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

If "1" is not set in the rotating flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3401: NO), other processing is executed (step S3402). In the other processing, the same processing as in steps S802 to S806 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment is executed.

When "1" is set in the rotating flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3401: YES), "1" is set in the target reel counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3403). After that, other processing is executed (step S3404). In the other processing, the same processing as in steps S808 to S812 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment is executed.

When "1" is not set in the acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current values of the target reel counters (step S3405: NO), the processes of steps S3406 to S3408 are executed. .. The processing contents of steps S3406 to S3408 are the same as those of steps S814 to S816 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

When "1" is set in the corresponding acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c (step S3405: YES), the constant speed control process is executed (step S3409). The processing content of the constant speed control processing is the same as step S817 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

After that, it is determined whether or not the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the value of the current target reel counter (step S3410). When the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 (step S3410: YES), "1" is set in the validity period flags 102a to 102c of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current values of the target reel counters. (Step S3411). As a result, the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current values of the target reel counters are enabled.

Here, at the timing when the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 after the constant speed rotation is started, the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started at the same time, and the same acceleration table is used. Even if the acceleration control is performed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be different depending on the previous stop position. On the other hand, the processes of steps S3410 and S3411, that is, the process of setting "1" in the validity period flags 102a to 102c when the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36, are the processes of the reels 32L and 32M. It is done individually for 32R. Therefore, the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated is different for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be started earlier than the configuration in which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at the same time.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in all the validity period flags 102a to 102c (step S3412). When "1" is set in all the validity period flags 102a to 102c (step S3412: YES), the button lighting process is executed (step S3413). In the button transfer process, all the stop buttons 42 to 44 are switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are individually activated, the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are switched from the off state to the on state after the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is aligned. It becomes possible.

The processing contents of steps S3414 to S3416 are the same as those of steps S822 to S824 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are individually activated, the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are switched from the off state to the on state after the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Can be aligned. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are turned on.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing content of the stepping motor control process executed by the main MPU 72 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a stepping motor control process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

If "1" is not set in the rotating flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3501: NO), other processing is executed (step S3502). In the other processing, the same processing as in steps S802 to S806 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment is executed.

When "1" is set in the rotating flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3501: YES), "1" is set in the target reel counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3503). After that, other processing is executed (step S3504). In the other processing, the same processing as in steps S808 to S812 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment is executed.

When "1" is not set in the acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current values of the target reel counters (step S3505: NO), the processes of steps S3506 to S3508 are executed. .. The processing contents of steps S3506 to S3508 are the same as those of steps S814 to S816 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

When "1" is set in the corresponding acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c (step S3505: YES), the constant speed control process is executed (step S3509). The processing content of the constant speed control processing is the same as step S817 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

After that, on condition that "1" is set in all the acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c (step S3510: YES), the reel index sensors of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current values of the target reel counters. At 36, it is determined whether or not the sensor cut van 37 is detected (step S3511). When the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 (step S3511: YES), "1" is set in the validity period flags 102a to 102c of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current values of the target reel counters. (Step S3512). As a result, the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current values of the target reel counters are enabled.

Here, at the timing when the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36 after the constant speed rotation is started, the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started at the same time, and the same acceleration table is used. Even if the acceleration control is performed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be different depending on the previous stop position. On the other hand, the processes of steps S3511 and S3512, that is, the process of setting "1" in the validity period flags 102a to 102c when the sensor cut van 37 is detected by the reel index sensor 36, are the reels 32L, 32M, respectively. It is done individually for 32R. Therefore, the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated is different for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be started earlier than the configuration in which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at the same time.

Further, the processes of steps S3511 and S3512 are executed on condition that "1" is set in all the acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c. Therefore, even if the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated is different for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop is stopped in the situation where the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed. It is possible to enable buttons 42-44 to be activated.

After that, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current values of the target reel counters are already lit (step S3513). Since the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are off, basically the corresponding stop button is used when "1" is set in the validity period flags 102a to 102c. 42 to 44 are in the off state. Therefore, basically, a negative determination is made in step S3513, and the button lighting process is executed (step S3514). In the button transfer process, the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the values of the current target reel counter are switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the stop buttons 42 to 44 for which the operation is enabled are sequentially switched from the off state to the on state, and the player can easily recognize the stop buttons 42 to 44 for which the operation is valid.

The processing contents of steps S3515 to S3517 are the same as those of steps S822 to S824 of the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the processes of steps S3511 and S3512 are executed on condition that "1" is set in all the acceleration completion flags 101a to 101c. Therefore, even if the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated is different for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop is stopped in the situation where the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed. It is possible to enable buttons 42-44 to be activated.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution conditions of the setting suggestion in the first section SC1 are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the end control process in the present embodiment executed by the effect side MPU 92.

In steps S3601 to S3604, the same process as in steps S3001 to S3004 of the end control process (FIG. 58) in the first embodiment is executed. When the second section initialization command is received (step S3605: YES), various clear processes are executed (step S3606). In the various clearing processes, various storage areas of the effect side RAM 94 used in the AT state ST5, such as the ending flag, the ending execution flag, the first ending condition storage area, and the second ending condition storage area, are cleared to "0".

After that, "1" is set in the flag after the end of the second section provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3607). The flag after the end of the second section is a flag for the effecting side MPU 92 to specify that it is the situation after the AT state ST5 and the second section SC2 are completed.

After that, the data table of the effect waiting for transition is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S3608). The data table of the transition waiting effect is a table in which various data for executing the transition waiting effect indicating that the situation is waiting for the transition from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 are set. The effecting side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the data table of the transition waiting effect, so that the transition waiting effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. To do so.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an effect control process during non-AT in the present embodiment executed by the effect side MPU 92.

When any setting suggestion command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3701: YES), on condition that "1" is set in the flag after the end of the second section of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3702: YES), the display table corresponding to the received setting suggestion command is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S3703). The display table is provided with a one-to-one correspondence with the setting suggestion command, and by reading the display table, the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the setting suggestion command received this time is added to the transition waiting effect. Is executed by. As described above, the image display device 63 additionally displays the setting suggestion image corresponding to the setting suggestion command received this time in the situation where the image corresponding to the transition waiting effect is displayed.

When the setting suggestion command has not been received (step S3701: NO), it is determined whether or not the section transition command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3704). When the section transition command is received (step S3704: YES), the flag after the end of the second section of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3705). After that, the processes of steps S3706 to S3710 are executed. If the section transition command has not been received (step S3704: NO), the process of step S3711 is executed. In steps S3706 to S3711, the same processes as in steps S3204 to S3209 of the non-AT effect control process (FIG. 63) in the first embodiment are executed.

According to the above configuration, any combination can be used in the combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in the first section SC1 on condition that the AT state ST5 and the second section SC2 are the first section SC1 after the end. The setting suggestion effect is executed when the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur due to the failure to win. As a result, in the first section SC1 generated by executing the partial clearing process (step S104) or the entire clearing process (step S105) when the supply of the operating power is started, the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15). ), Even if a game that does not win any of the roles is executed, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being executed.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing content of the additional period processing executed by the main MPU 72 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the processing for the additional period in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

First, the second additional lottery process is executed (step S3801). The processing content of the second additional lottery process is the same as step S2501 of the additional period process (FIG. 50) in the first embodiment.

When the addition of the number of sets of one or more times is selected in the second addition lottery process (step S3802: YES), the addition process of the number of sets is executed (step S3803). In the set count addition process, the set count selected in the second additional lottery process (step S3801) is added to the set count counter of the main RAM 74.

After that, it is determined whether or not any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in this game (step S3804). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3804, "1" is set in the midway freeze occurrence flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3805). Further, the freeze counter setting process is executed (step S3806). The processing contents of these steps S3805 and S3806 are the same as those of steps S2505 and S2506 of the additional period processing (FIG. 50) in the first embodiment.

After that, the lottery process of the occurrence timing is executed (step S3807). The processing content of the lottery processing of the occurrence timing is the same as step S2508 of the additional period processing (FIG. 50) in the first embodiment. When the start timing is selected in the occurrence timing lottery process (step S3807) (step S3808: YES), "1" is set in the start occurrence flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3809). When the timing for the first stop is selected in the occurrence timing lottery process (step S3807) (step S3810: YES), "1" is set in the first stop occurrence flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3811). .. When the timing for the second stop is selected in the occurrence timing lottery process (step S3807) (step S3810: NO), "1" is set in the second stop occurrence flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3812). .. When the process of step S3809, the process of step S3811, or the process of step S3812 is executed, the freeze-corresponding winning command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3813). The action when the processes of steps S3807 to S3813 are executed is the same as the action when the processes of steps S2508 to S2514 are executed in the additional period process (FIG. 50) in the first embodiment. be.

When a negative determination is made in step S3804, it is determined whether or not any of the index values IV = 7 to 10 has been won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in this game (step S3814). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3814, the lottery process of the occurrence timing is executed (step S3815). The processing content of the lottery processing of the occurrence timing is the same as step S2508 of the additional period processing (FIG. 50) in the first embodiment. Then, it is determined whether or not the timing at the start is selected in the lottery process of the occurrence timing (step S3816).

When the start timing is selected (step S3816: YES), "1" is set in the midway freeze occurrence flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3817). Further, the freeze counter setting process is executed (step S3818). The processing contents of these steps S3817 and S3818 are the same as those of step S2505 and step S2506 of the additional period processing (FIG. 50) in the first embodiment. Further, "1" is set in the start generation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3819). After that, the freeze-corresponding winning command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3813). As a result, the freeze period before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R this time is started, provided that "1" is not set in both the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main RAM 74. Is generated and an effect indicating that the number of sets has been added during the freeze period is executed.

On the other hand, in the case where none of the index values IV = 1 to 10 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15) in this game (step S3814: NO), or the index value IV = 7 to 10 is satisfied. When the first stop time or the second stop time is selected in the occurrence timing lottery process (step S3815) executed with the winning as a trigger (step S3816: NO), the non-freeze correspondence winning command is issued to the directing side MPU92. (Step S3820). The processing content of the effect side MPU 92 when the non-freeze correspondence winning command is received is the same as that of the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when any of the index values IV = 7 to 10 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 15), the start timing is selected in the occurrence timing lottery process (step S3815). In this case, the effect indicating that the number of sets has been added is executed in the situation where the freeze period has occurred, whereas the timing at the time of the first stop or the timing at the first stop in the occurrence timing lottery process (step S3815) is executed. When the timing at the time of the second stop is selected, the freeze period does not occur. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the freeze period does not occur even when any of the index values IV = 7 to 10 is won and the number of sets is added.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configurations of other embodiments may be applied individually to the configurations of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied in combination. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, or the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. good.

(1) After one of the first ending command and the second ending command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the directing MPU 92 in each of the above embodiments, "1" is set in the ending flag of the directing RAM 94. Even so, the effect side MPU 92 determines whether or not the other of the first ending command and the second ending command has been received, and if the other command is received, the effect control process during AT (FIG. 56). ) May be executed. As a result, even if "1" is set in the ending flag of the production side RAM 94, for example, triggered by the limited total net increase in the number of game media (that is, when the second ending command is received), the second ending flag is subsequently set. Even if the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied triggered by the number of continuous games in the section SC2 (that is, when the first ending command is received), the ending effect is executed correspondingly. It becomes possible to.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, "1" is set in either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74, and the remaining number of continuous games or the remaining number of sets in the AT state ST5 is set. If the additional processing to be increased can be executed but the additional effect is not executed, an effect suggesting the setting value currently set as the current usage target is displayed each time the additional processing is executed. It may be a configuration to be executed. As the effect suggesting the set value, the effect that the set value set as the current use target is clearly specified, and the effect that the set value set as the current use target is included in the high setting value range is shown. And so on. As a result, it is possible to give a privilege of setting suggestion to the winning of the index value IV having a low winning probability in a situation where no profit is substantially given even if the addition processing is executed.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, when "1" is set in either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74, the freeze period in the addition period and the index value IV = 10 are won. In this case, the reverse push notification and the additional effect are all not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and some of them may not be executed but some may be executed. For example, the freeze period in the addition period is not executed, but the reverse push notification and the addition effect when the index value IV = 10 is won may be executed, and the freeze period in the addition period is executed, but the index is executed. The reverse push notification and the additional effect when the value IV = 10 is won may not be executed.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, when "1" is set in any of the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main RAM 74, the situation where the ending confirmation effect is executed and the ending effect. Regardless of the situation in which is being executed, the freeze period in the additional period, the reverse push notification when the index value IV = 10 is won, and the additional effect are all not executed. The type of effect that is not executed may be different depending on the situation in which is being executed and the situation in which the ending effect is being executed. For example, in the situation where the ending confirmation effect is executed, the freeze period in the additional period is not executed, but the reverse push notification and the additional effect are executed when the index value IV = 10 is won, whereas the ending is executed. In the situation where the additional effect is being executed, the freeze period in the additional period, the reverse push notification when the index value IV = 10 is won, and the additional effect may not all be executed. As a result, it becomes possible to gradually regulate the execution of the production.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, when "1" is set in either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74, one set of the AT state ST5 is completed and a new set is set. Even if is continued, the corresponding effect is not executed, but it is not limited to this, and the effect corresponding to the end of one set of AT state ST5 and the continuation of a new set is provided. It may be a configuration to be executed. In this case, the continuous effect may be executed in the same mode regardless of whether or not "1" is set in either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74. When "1" is set in either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the side RAM 74, "1" is set in both the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main RAM 74. The continuous effect may be executed in a manner that is less conspicuous than when there is no such effect.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, when the setting suggestion effect is executed by executing the game in the first section SC1 after the end of the AT state ST5 and the second section SC2, the image display device 63 waits for the transition. Character images G21 to G23 corresponding to the setting suggestion effect are added to the image corresponding to the effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image corresponding to the transition waiting effect in the image display device 63 is added. The setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the display content of. For example, when the background image is displayed as an image corresponding to the transition waiting effect, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the display mode of the background image.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the setting suggestion effect is executed by executing the game in the first section SC1 after the end of the AT state ST5 and the second section SC2. In addition to or instead of, an effect different from the setting suggestion effect may be executed. For example, a premier effect that determines the generation of profit when it occurs in the second section SC2 may be executed. However, even if the premier effect is generated, no profit is generated, so that it is preferable that the premier effect is executed in a state in which the player can recognize it.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, when the supply of operating power is started, the main MPU 72 executes a partial clear process (step S104) or a complete clear process (step S105), so that the game section becomes the first. In the case of one section SC1, the image display device 63 is configured to display the image corresponding to the normal game state ST1 and not to display the image corresponding to the first section SC1. However, in this situation, the image display device The image corresponding to the first section SC1 may be displayed at 63. In this case, in the first section SC1 generated by executing the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) when the supply of the operating power is started, the AT state ST5 and the second section Similar to the first section SC1 after the SC2 is completed, the image display device 63 may be configured to display an image corresponding to the transition waiting effect, and a game in which no combination is won in the first section SC1. When it is executed, the setting suggestion effect may be executed. Further, in the first section SC1 generated by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a complete clear process (step S105) when the supply of operating power is started instead of the configuration, the AT state Similar to the first section SC1 after the end of ST5 and the second section SC2, the image display device 63 displays the image corresponding to the transition waiting effect, but the game that does not win any combination in the first section SC1. Even if it is executed, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed. Further, in the first section SC1 generated by executing the partial clear process (step S104) or the entire clear process (step S105) when the supply of the operating power is started, the image corresponding to the transition waiting effect is displayed. May be configured such that an image indicating that is a different image and is the first section SC1 is displayed on the image display device 63.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the transition waiting effect is executed when the AT state ST5 and the second section SC2 are completed, but the transition waiting effect may not be executed. For example, when the AT state ST5 and the second section SC2 are completed, the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 may be started. Even in this case, if a game in which none of the winning combinations is won is executed in the first section SC1, the setting suggestion effect is executed in the situation where the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. It may be configured.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, when a game in which none of the winning combinations is won is executed in the first section SC1, the setting suggestion effect is surely executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. , When a game that does not win any of the winning combinations is executed in the first section SC1, the setting suggestion lottery process is executed, and when the game is won in the setting suggestion lottery process, the setting suggestion effect is executed. May be good. In this case, the probability of winning in the setting suggestion lottery process may increase as the number of games executed in the first section SC1 increases without the transition to the second section SC2 occurring. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of repeating the game in the first section SC1 without causing the transition to the second section SC2.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, regardless of whether or not the ending condition is satisfied and the second section SC2 is completed, the first section SC1 generated by the end of the AT state ST5 and the second section SC2. For example, if a game that does not win any of the roles is executed, the setting suggestion effect is executed, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the ending condition is satisfied and the second section SC2 is completed. If a game that does not win any of the winning combinations is executed in the first section SC1 generated by this, the setting suggestion effect is executed, but the second section SC2 is completed without satisfying the ending condition. In the first section SC1 generated by the above, even if a game in which none of the winning combinations is won is executed, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage that the ending condition is satisfied and the second section SC2 ends.

In addition, the first section SC1 generated when the ending condition is satisfied and the second section SC2 ends is better than the first section SC1 generated when the second section SC2 ends without the ending condition being satisfied. However, it may be configured so that the probability that the setting suggestion effect is executed is high when the game that does not win any of the roles is executed, and the suggestion of the setting value is made when the game that does not win any of the roles is executed. The setting suggestion effect may be executed in a highly accurate manner.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the transition to the second section SC2 occurs by winning any of the winning combinations in the lottery process (FIG. 15) of the winning combination executed in the first section SC1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a transition to the second section SC2 may occur when a predetermined combination is won in the lottery process (FIG. 15) of the winning combination executed in the first section SC1. , The transition lottery process is executed by winning a predetermined combination in the combination lottery process (FIG. 15) executed in the first section SC1, and when the transfer lottery process wins, the second section SC2 The configuration may be such that a transition to the above occurs.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, a freeze period occurs when the additional corresponding sound is output in the game in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. In a game where the order is not notified, the freeze period does not occur when the additional corresponding voice is output, but the freeze period is not limited to this, and is the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R notified? A freeze period may be generated when the additional corresponding sound is output regardless of whether or not it is.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, when the add-on voice is output in the game in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, the add-on voice is output in the situation where the freeze period occurs. The output is started and the output of the additional voice is completed, but it is not limited to this, and the output of the additional voice is started in the situation where the freeze period is occurring, but the additional voice is added. The freeze period may end while the corresponding voice is being output. As a result, when the player who is surprised that the output of the additional voice is suddenly started and the player mistakenly operates the stop buttons 42 to 44, the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is invalidated and the additional voice is output. Since the freeze period is canceled during the process, it is possible to prevent the freeze period from becoming excessively long.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, when the addition-corresponding voice is output due to the addition of the set number of times during the addition period, one type of addition-corresponding voice is always output, but the present invention is limited to this. A plurality of types of additional voices are set, and the additional voices to be output may be changed according to the value of the number of sets to be added. In this case, it is possible to notify the player of the value of the number of sets added according to the type of output corresponding voice. In this configuration, a freeze period occurs when the first addition-compatible voice, which has a relatively high volume among a plurality of types of addition-compatible voice, is output in a game in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified. However, when the second addition-compatible voice, which has a relatively low volume among a plurality of types of addition-compatible voice, is output in a game in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, the freeze period does not occur. May be. This makes it possible to prevent the freeze period from occurring excessively.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, when the credit insertion button 47 is operated during the effect mode selection period in the addition period, the remaining switching period for the effect mode to be selected is reset to the initial value. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and when the credit insertion button 47 is operated, a predetermined fixed period is added to the remaining switching period for the effect mode to be selected. It may be configured. The predetermined fixed period may be a period longer than the initial value of the remaining switching period, or may be a shorter period. When the predetermined fixed period is shorter than the remaining switching period, the remaining switching period of the production mode currently selected for the operation of the credit insertion button 47 is not extended by an excessively long period. It becomes possible to.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, when the credit insertion button 47 is operated a plurality of times in a situation where one production mode is selected during the selection period of the production mode in the addition period, the one is applied each time. The remaining switching period for which the production mode is the selection target is reset to the initial value, but it is not limited to this, and credits are inserted in the situation where one production mode is the selection target. An upper limit may be set for the number of times the remaining switching period is reset to the initial value for the operation of the button 47. The upper limit may be set to once, or the upper limit may be set to two or more times. This makes it possible to prevent the event in which the remaining switching period is reset to the initial value from being excessively repeated.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, the remaining switching period is set regardless of whether a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 or the credit insertion button 47 is operated during the selection period of the effect mode in the addition period. It was configured to be reset to the initial value, but it is not limited to this, and when the credit insertion button 47 is operated, the remaining switching period is reset to the initial value, but the medal insertion slot 45 Even if a medal is inserted, the remaining switching period may not be reset to the initial value. When a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the remaining switching period is reset to the initial value, but credits are inserted. Even if the button 47 is operated, the remaining switching period may not be reset to the initial value.

(19) In each of the above embodiments, when the credit insertion button 47 is operated during the selection period of the effect mode in the addition period, the remaining switching period is reset to the initial value on condition that the game medium is bet by the operation. Although it is configured to be set, it is not limited to this, and when the credit insertion button 47 is operated, the remaining switching period is reset to the initial value regardless of whether or not the game medium is bet by the operation. It may be configured to be set. As a result, even after the replay winning is established, even if the operation of the credit insertion button 47 is misunderstood that it corresponds to the determination of the type of production mode and the credit insertion button 47 is operated, the remaining switching is performed. The period will be reset to the initial value.

(20) Stop buttons 42 to individually from reels 32L, 32M, 32R in which the reel index sensor 36 is turned on in a situation where the acceleration period of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed as in the third embodiment. For the configuration in which the operation of 44 is enabled, all the stop buttons 42 to 44 are changed from the off state to the on state at the timing when all the stop buttons 42 to 44 are enabled as in the second embodiment. The configuration may be switchable.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the measurement for a predetermined period is started before the predetermined response process is executed, and after the measurement for the predetermined period is completed after the predetermined response process is executed, after the measurement is completed. The configuration for executing the process is applied to the output control of the AT signal when a new set continues in the AT state ST5, but the target to which the configuration is applied is not limited to the output control of the AT signal. For example, in the AT state ST5, the output state of the AT signal is the HI level, and in the BB state ST2 or the RB state ST3, the output state of the bonus signal is the HI level. When it occurs, the above configuration is used for the configuration in which the output state of the bonus signal is switched to the HI level when the output duration (for example, 200 milliseconds) elapses after the output state of the AT signal is first switched to the LOW level. May be applied. Further, in a configuration in which a movable object for production is provided and the execution of a process for ending the game is awaited while the movable object for production is operating for a predetermined production period, the predetermined value is provided. The medal may be paid out in the medium giving process during the production period.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, when a new set is continued in the AT state ST5, the medium addition process (step S315) is performed in a situation where the output state of the AT signal is once switched to the LOW level and the OFF continuation period is measured. ) Is executed, but in addition to or in place of the medium imparting process (step S315), for example, when a new set is continued in the AT state ST5, the freeze period has a predetermined probability (for example, 50%). In the configuration in which the above occurs, the freeze period may occur in a situation where the OFF duration is being measured. In this case, if the freeze period is shorter than the OFF continuation period, the measurement of the OFF continuation period is completed if the total period of the medium grant processing processing period and the freeze period is equal to or longer than the OFF continuation period. There is no processing waiting period to wait until.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, since the special replay prize is established in the first half RT state, the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 are turned off, and then the credit insertion button 47 is operated. When the start lever 41 is operated without any problem, the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 are collectively lit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the credit insertion button 47 is not limited to this. Even if the start lever 41 is operated without being operated, the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 are sequentially turned on from the off state in the same manner as when the credit insertion button 47 is operated. It may be configured to switch to a state.

(24) In each of the above embodiments, when the special replay winning is established in the first half RT state, each of the light emitting units 64a to 64c of the main side bet display unit 64 is maintained in the lit state and each of the production side bet display units 69. The light emitting units 69a to 69c are turned off, and then the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 are turned on. However, when the replay winning is established in this way, the main side bet display unit 64 While maintaining the light emitting units 64a to 64c in the lighting state, the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 are turned off, and then the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the effect side bet display unit 69 are turned on. The configuration to be performed may be applied when another replay prize is established. In this case, the other replay winnings may be configured so that it is difficult for the player to understand that the replay winnings have been established as compared with the normal replay winnings.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, when the replay winning is established, the lighting states of the light emitting units 64a to 64c of the main bet display unit 64 are maintained as they are, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the replay prize is established, each of the light emitting units 64a to 64c of the main bet display unit 64 is temporarily turned off, and the replay is maintained after being kept off for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). The same number of light emitting units 64a to 64c as in the winning game may be turned on. In this case, if the special replay prize is established in the first half RT state, both the main side bet display unit 64 and the production side bet display unit 69 are temporarily turned off, and when a predetermined period elapses thereafter, the main side bet is placed. The display unit 64 may be returned to the lit state, and the effect side bet display unit 69 may be returned to the lit state when the credit insertion button 47 is operated, the medal is inserted, or the start lever 41 is operated.

(26) In each of the above embodiments, when the replay prize is established, the lighting states of the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 remain as they are, except when the special replay prize is established in the first half RT state described later. The configuration is maintained, but the configuration is not limited to this, and even if the replay winning is established, the light emitting units 69a to 69c of the production side bet display unit 69 are temporarily turned off for a predetermined period ( For example, after being kept in the off state for 2 seconds), the same number of light emitting units 69a to 69c as in the game in which the replay winning is established may be turned on. In this case, regardless of whether the special replay prize is established in the first half RT state or the other replay prizes are established, the production side bet display unit 69 is temporarily turned off, and in the former case, after that. When the credit insertion button 47 is operated, the medal is inserted, or the start lever 41 is operated, the production side bet display unit 69 returns to the lit state, and in the latter case, the production side when a predetermined period elapses thereafter. The bet display unit 69 may be configured to return to the lit state.

(27) In each of the above embodiments, if either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 and the winning is achieved with any of the index values IV = 18 to 21, it is simply the case. The configuration is such that the BB winning data or the RB winning data is not newly stored in the main RAM 74 when the winning is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and either the BB winning data or the RB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. If the winning is achieved with any of the index values IV = 18 to 21 in the situation where the winning is performed, the BB winning data or the RB winning data will not be newly stored in the main RAM 74 as a result of the winning. Another privilege may be given to the player. As the granting of the other privilege, for example, the lottery process for shifting to the AT state ST5 may be executed in a mode dedicated to the situation, or the setting suggestion effect may be executed, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed. When the lottery process for determining whether or not the item is won is executed, the setting suggestion effect may be executed.

(28) In each of the above embodiments, when the AT state ST5 ends, the second section SC2 surely ends and becomes the first section SC1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the AT state is not limited to this. Even if ST5 is completed, the second section SC2 may be configured to continue as it is. For example, when the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 when the AT state ST5 ends is less than or equal to the number of maintenance reference games (for example, 500 games), or when the AT state ST5 ends, the limited total net increase number of game media is If the number of sheets is less than the maintenance reference number (for example, 500), the second section SC2 may be maintained as it is, and if the maintenance lottery process executed when the AT state ST5 ends is won. The second section SC2 may be maintained as it is. If the second section SC2 is maintained even if the AT state ST5 ends, an effect different from the transition waiting effect may be executed when the AT state ST5 ends, and the AT state ST5 ends. In some cases, the transition waiting effect may be executed. If the transition waiting effect is executed when the AT state ST5 ends, the transition waiting effect is executed when a game that wins any of the winning combinations is executed in the situation where the transition waiting effect is executed. By adopting a configuration in which the effect is completed and the transition effect is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the second section SC2 has continued as it is when the AT state ST5 ends.

(29) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the number of effective lines is only one of the main line ML, and the configuration may be such that the number of effective lines is two, three, or four or more. In this case, the number of effective lines may increase as the number of bet game media increases, or the maximum number of effective lines may be set regardless of the number of bet game media.

(30) In each of the above embodiments, the privilege of paying out medals when a small winning combination is established is given, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and some privilege is given to the player. It should be. For example, a prize other than a medal may be paid out when a small winning combination is established. Further, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages medals owned by a player by credit, an increase in credited medals corresponds to granting a privilege.

(31) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B type slot machine, C type, A type and C type composite type, B type and C type composite type, and RT game, CT game or AT game. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type equipped with. In addition, there may be a configuration in which a bonus state that is advantageous to the player exists.

(32) The design of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not limited to a picture, a number, a character, etc., but may be a geometric line, a figure, or the like. Further, the design can be composed of light, color, or the like, the design can be composed of a three-dimensional shape or the like, and the design can be composed even if these are combined. That is, the design may have a function as information having distinctiveness.

(33) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 is shown, but it may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a game is played by using a game ball as a game medium, and the slot machine and the pachinko machine may be applied. It may be applied to a gaming machine in a form fused with the machine.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. Situation setting means (function to execute the process of step S1803 in the main MPU 72) to be set in the advantageous transition possible situation (second section SC2), and
Processing of advantageous transition means (steps S2013 to S2105 and steps S2113 to S2116 in the main MPU 72) to shift the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5) advantageous to the player when the advantageous transition is possible. Function to execute) and
With the continuation reference measuring means (AT continuation counter and set count counter of the main RAM 74) used to make it possible to specify the remaining continuation reference number (the number of remaining continuation games, the remaining number of sets) in the advantageous gaming state. ,
First advantageous ending means for ending the advantageous gaming state when the remaining continuation reference number becomes "0" with the execution of the game (function of executing the processes of steps S2319 to S2321 in the main MPU 72). When,
Based on the fact that the game is executed in the advantageous transferable situation, the situation correspondence information (the number of continuous games, the total net increase number of games with restrictions) in the situation correspondence storage means (continuous game number counter 74c, total acquisition number counter 74d) is provided. Information updating means to be updated (a function of executing the process of step S1905 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the process of steps S1907 to S1912 in the main MPU 72), and
Situation end means for ending the advantageous transition possible situation based on the situation correspondence information becoming the end reference information (upper limit number of games, upper limit net increase number) (function for executing the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72). When,
When the advantageous transition possible situation is terminated by the situation ending means, the second advantageous ending means (step in the main MPU 72) for ending the advantageous gaming state even if the remaining continuation reference number is not "0". Function to execute the processing of S1914) and
Based on the occurrence of an additional opportunity (transition winning of the additional period, winning at the index value IV = 10, additional winning) in the advantageous gaming state, the continuation reference measuring means is used so that the remaining continuation reference number is increased. Addition execution means (step S2205, step S2209, step S2213 and step S2503 in the main MPU 72) for executing the addition process (processes in step S2205, step S2209, step S2213 and step S2503 of the main MPU 72) for updating the information. (Function to execute the processing of) and
An additional effect control means (step S312, step S317, step S720 in the main MPU 72) for executing the additional effect (freeze period, reverse push notification, effect of the additional period) when the additional process is executed, Functions for executing the processes of step S2206, step S2210, step S2214, step S2514, step S2515, step S2809 and step S2810, the effect mode selection process on the effect side MPU 92, the effect control process during the addition period, and the process of step S2905. Function to execute) and
When the remaining continuation reference number becomes a number in which the situation correspondence information can be the end reference information, the limitation is such that the addition process can be executed but the addition effect is not executed. Situation generating means (function to execute the processes of step S308, step S316, step S716, step S2703, step S2704, step S2707, step S2708 and step S2808 on the main MPU 72, and the processes of steps S2901 and S2907 on the directing MPU 92. Function to execute) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A1, since the transition to the advantageous gaming state may occur when the advantageous transition is possible, the player who expects the transition to the advantageous gaming state is expected to be in the advantageous transition possible situation. Become. In addition, when the situation correspondence information updated based on the execution of the game in the advantageous transferable situation becomes the end standard information, the advantageous transferable situation ends, and when the advantageous transferable situation ends, it remains. Even if the continuation reference number of is not "0", the advantageous game state ends. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from continuing excessively. In addition, when the addition process for increasing the remaining continuation reference number is executed in the advantageous gaming state, the addition effect is executed, so that the player's satisfaction when the remaining continuation reference number increases is enhanced. Is possible.

In this case, if the remaining continuation reference number in the advantageous gaming state becomes a number that can be the end reference information for the situation correspondence information of the advantageous transition possible situation, the addition process can be executed but the addition effect is not executed. It will be a predetermined restriction situation. In the predetermined restriction situation, even if the number of remaining continuation reference numbers in the advantageous gaming state further increases, it does not substantially benefit the player, but even in such a situation, the execution of the additional processing should not be blocked. As a result, it is not necessary to switch between the situation in which the additional processing is executed and the situation in which the additional processing is not executed, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the program capacity. On the other hand, in the predetermined restriction situation, even if the addition process is executed, the addition effect is not executed, so that the player is not made aware that the remaining continuation reference number that is not substantially beneficial to the player has been added. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform the process for advancing the game.

Feature A2. Means for starting a specific effect (ending final effect) when the remaining continuation reference number becomes such that the situation correspondence information can be the end reference information (process of step S2910 in the effect side MPU 92). The gaming machine according to feature A1, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the feature A2, when the remaining continuation reference number in the advantageous gaming state becomes the number that can be the end reference information in the situation correspondence information of the advantageous transition possible situation, the specific effect is executed, so that the advantageous transition possible situation It is possible to make the player recognize that the situation correspondence information can be the end reference information. In this case, in this situation, even if the addition process is executed, the addition effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific effect, and the player's effect is substantially changed. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the remaining non-profitable continuation reference number has been added.

Feature A3. When the remaining continuation reference number is a number in which the situation correspondence information can be the end reference information and the situation correspondence information becomes the predetermined reference information before reaching the end reference information, the pre-end effect ( The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that the means for starting the ending effect) (the function of executing the processes of steps S2912 and S2918 in the effect side MPU 92) is provided.

According to the feature A3, the situation correspondence information of the advantageous transition possible situation can be the end reference information, and when the situation correspondence information becomes the predetermined reference information before reaching the end reference information, the pre-end effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the situation correspondence information of the advantageous transition possible situation will soon reach the end reference information. In this case, in this situation, even if the addition process is executed, the addition effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific effect, and the player's effect is substantially changed. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the remaining non-profitable continuation reference number has been added.

Feature A4. A means (main side) for executing a continuous effect (an effect indicating that a new set in the AT state ST5 has been started) when one set in the advantageous gaming state is completed and a new set is continued. It is provided with a function of executing the process of step S2315 in the MPU 72 and a function of executing the process of step S2905 in the effect side MPU 92).
The gaming machine according to feature A2 or A3, wherein the continuous effect is not executed even if one set of the advantageous gaming state is completed and a new set is continued in the predetermined limiting situation.

According to the feature A4, in the predetermined restriction situation, even if one set in the advantageous gaming state is completed and a new set is continued, the continuous effect is not executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the specific effect if the feature A2 configuration is provided, and the player's attention to the pre-end effect if the feature A3 configuration is provided. It is possible to increase the degree.

Feature A5. The game according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the additional effect control means executes a progress stop effect (freeze period) for stopping the progress of the game in response to the player's operation as the additional effect. Machine.

According to the feature A5, since the progress stop effect is executed as the additional effect, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the number of remaining continuation reference numbers in the advantageous gaming state has increased. In this case, if the remaining continuation reference number in the advantageous gaming state becomes a number that can be the end reference information for the situation correspondence information of the advantageous transition possible situation, the progress stop effect is not executed even if the addition process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the digestion efficiency of the game from being lowered due to the execution of the additional processing that is not substantially beneficial to the player.

Feature A6. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operating means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of a pattern in the pattern display means, and
A game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72), which sets the game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the game is executed.
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A symbol display that controls the symbol display means so that the variable display of the symbol is started when the game is executed and the variable display of the symbol is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72) and
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Winning correspondence control means (a function of executing the processing of step S314 and step S315 in the main MPU 72) for executing correspondence control, and
With
As a winning combination in the lottery process of the combination, the first stop result (“white 7” symbol on the left reel 32L, middle) based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode (reverse push). A "white 7" symbol is displayed on the reel 32M and a "red 7" symbol is displayed on the right reel 32R), the first predetermined prize (special bell prize) is established, and the stop operation means is the second stop operation mode (forward push). A predetermined combination (index value IV = 10) is set in which the second stop result (combination of "bell" symbols) is displayed and the second predetermined prize (first bell prize) is established based on the operation in. ,
When the addition process is executed in the game in which the predetermined combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, the addition effect control means operates the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode as the addition effect. The first notification (reverse push notification) that makes the player recognizable what should be done is executed.
When the predetermined combination is won in the lottery process of the combination in the predetermined restriction situation, the gaming machine makes it possible for the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in the second stop operation mode. 2 Any one of features A1 to A5 characterized in that it is provided with means for executing notification (forward push notification) (a function of executing the processes of steps S2811 and S2812 in the main MPU 72). The described gaming machine.

According to the feature A6, when the addition process is executed in the game in which the predetermined combination is won, the first notification that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in the first stop operation mode is provided. When the game is executed and the player operates the stop operation means according to the first notification, the first stop result is displayed and the first predetermined prize is established. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the number of remaining continuous reference numbers in the advantageous gaming state has increased by using the winning result. On the other hand, if the remaining continuation reference number in the advantageous gaming state becomes a number that can be the end reference information in the situation correspondence information of the advantageous transition possible situation, even if the addition process is executed in the game in which the predetermined combination is won, Instead of the first notification, the second notification is executed so that the player can recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in the second stop operation mode, and the player operates the stop operation means according to the second notification. As a result, the second stop result is displayed and the second predetermined prize is established. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined prize from being established for the execution of the additional processing that does not substantially benefit the player.

Feature A7. The situation correspondence information is used to execute the game when the advantageous shiftable situation continues from the total number of game media given by the game executed when the advantageous shiftable situation continues. When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of the digested game media is set as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as the predetermined reference value, and the information of the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value ( The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, which is characterized in that the total net increase in the number of game media is limited.

According to the feature A7, since the advantageous shiftable situation ends based on the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous shiftable situation reaches the end reference information, the advantageous shiftable situation becomes excessive. It is possible to prevent it from continuing for a long time. In this case, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect.

Feature A8. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein the situation correspondence information is information on the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable situation.

According to the feature A8, since the advantageous shiftable situation ends based on the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable situation reaches the end criterion information, the advantageous shiftable situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to do so. In this case, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A8, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E5, the features F1 to F4, the features G1 to G5, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H6 and features I1 to I4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Situation setting means (function to execute the process of step S1803 in the main MPU 72) to be set in the advantageous transition possible situation (second section SC2), and
Processing of advantageous transition means (steps S2013 to S2105 and steps S2113 to S2116 in the main MPU 72) to shift the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5) advantageous to the player when the advantageous transition is possible. Function to execute) and
The first advantageous termination means (main side MPU 72) that terminates the advantageous gaming state based on the occurrence of a state termination trigger (both the AT continuation counter and the set count counter of the main RAM 74 are "0") in the advantageous gaming state. (Function to execute the processes of steps S2319 to S2321) in
With the first situation ending means (the function of executing the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72) to end the advantageous transition possible situation based on the occurrence of the situation end trigger (establishment of the ending condition) in the advantageous transition possible situation. ,
When the advantageous transition possible situation is terminated by the first situation ending means, the second advantageous ending means (processing of step S1914 in the main MPU 72) for ending the advantageous gaming state even if the state ending trigger has not occurred. Function to execute) and
When the advantageous gaming state is terminated by the first advantageous ending means, the second situation ending means (step S1902-step in the main MPU 72) for ending the advantageous transition possible situation even if the situation ending trigger has not occurred. (Functions for executing the processes of S1904, step S1914, step S2319, and step S2320) and
When the advantageous gaming state ends, the display means (image display device 63) is made to perform an end correspondence display (transition waiting effect), and the end correspondence display is continued until the advantageous transition possible situation is newly set. Corresponding display execution means (function to execute the process of step S3007 in the effect side MPU 92) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, the transition to the advantageous gaming state may occur when the advantageous transition is possible, so that the player who expects the transition to the advantageous gaming state is expected to be in the advantageous transition possible situation. Become. In addition, the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the situation end opportunity, and when the advantageous transition possible situation ends, the advantageous gaming state ends even if the state end opportunity does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from continuing excessively. In addition, when the state end trigger occurs and the advantageous gaming state ends, the advantageous transition possible situation can end even if the situation end trigger does not occur, so that the advantageous transition is possible with the end of the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to allow the situation to end.

In this case, when the advantageous gaming state ends, the display means displays the end correspondence, so that the player can clearly recognize that the advantageous gaming state has ended. In addition, this end-correspondence display will continue until it is newly set to the advantageous transition possible status. As a result, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the situation is after the advantageous gaming state is completed and before the advantageous transition possible status is set again by using the end correspondence display. Since the end-corresponding display is simply displayed as it is, it is possible to achieve such an excellent effect while reducing the processing load.

Feature B2. When the information erasing process (process of step S104 and step S105 of the main MPU 72) is executed when the supply of the operating power is started and the situation is not the advantageous shiftable situation, the display means. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the end-corresponding display is not performed.

According to the feature B2, when the information erasing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started and the situation is not a favorable transition possible situation, the display means displays the end correspondence. Therefore, when the situation is not the advantageous transition possible situation, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize whether or not the situation is the situation after the end of the advantageous gaming state.

Feature B3. The feature B1 or B2 is characterized in that the situation setting means is set to the advantageous shiftable situation based on winning any of the winning combinations in the winning combination lottery process (processing of step S307 of the main MPU 72). The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature B3, in a situation where the advantageous transferable situation is not possible, the advantageous transferable situation is set based on the fact that one of the roles is won in the lottery process of the combination. It can be associated with the result of the lottery process. In addition, in the situation where the advantageous transition is not possible in the configuration, if the game in which no combination is won is repeated in the combination lottery process, the situation will continue, but the advantageous gaming state. Since the end correspondence display is continued in the situation after the end of, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the situation is continuing.

Feature B4. The end-corresponding display executing means is at least a part of the end-corresponding display based on the fact that the game is executed after the advantageous gaming state ends without making a new setting for the advantageous transition possible situation. It is provided with content changing means (a function of executing the processing of step S3103 and step S3104 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the processing of step S3202 in the directing MPU 92) for changing the display content (character images G21 to G23). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3.

According to the feature B4, at least a part of the display contents of the end correspondence display changes based on the fact that the game is executed without making a new setting to the advantageous transition possible state after the advantageous game state ends. Therefore, even if the game is repeatedly executed in a situation where the advantageous transition is not possible, it is possible to change the display content of the display means so as not to reduce the attention to the game. Is possible.

Feature B5. It is equipped with a setting means (a function to execute the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from a setting value of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage.
The content changing means determines the display content when changing at least a part of the display content of the end-corresponding display in a determination mode according to the set value set as the target of use. The gaming machine according to feature B4, which comprises (a function of executing the process of step S3103 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature B5, at least a part of the display contents of the end correspondence display is changed based on the fact that the game is executed without making a new setting to the advantageous transition possible state after the advantageous game state ends. If so, the display content is determined in a determination mode according to the set value set as the target of use. That is, when the game is executed in a situation where the advantageous transition is not possible after the end of the advantageous gaming state, the setting suggestion is given to it. As a result, it is possible to make the execution of the game in a situation where the advantageous transition is not possible a profitable event for the player, not as a disadvantage.

Feature B6. When the display content of at least a part of the end-corresponding display is changed, the set value-corresponding means shifts the display content to the advantageous transition possible situation after the advantageous gaming state ends. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the set value set as the target of use is determined in a determination mode that makes it easier for the player to predict as the number of games executed without any increase increases.

According to the feature B6, the setting suggestion in the end correspondence display predicts the set value for the player so that the game is repeatedly executed without making a new setting to the advantageous transition possible state after the advantageous game state ends. It will be easy to do. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the game is repeatedly executed in a situation where the advantageous transition is not possible.

Feature B7. When the advantageous shiftable situation is set, the determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S1804 to S1807 in the main MPU 72) for determining the advantage (number of released games, transition mode) of the advantageous shiftable situation ,
A transition-compatible effect execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3204 to S3208 in the effect side MPU 92) that enables the transition-compatible effect (transition effect) to be executed when the advantageous transition-possible situation is set.
With
The transition-corresponding effect execution means executes the processes of steps S3204 to S3207 in the effect-side MPU 92 in a determination mode corresponding to the advantage determined by the determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the feature B7, the advantage of the advantageous shiftable situation is determined when the advantageous shiftable situation is set, so that the player pays attention to the determined advantage. In this case, the effect content of the shift-corresponding effect executed when the advantageous shiftable situation is set is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the advantage of the advantageous shiftable situation. As a result, it is possible to suggest the advantage of the advantageous shiftable situation by using the shift corresponding effect for making the player recognize that the advantageous shiftable situation is newly set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the transitional effect.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B7, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E5, the features F1 to F4, the features G1 to G5, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H6 and features I1 to I4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to each feature of the feature A group and the feature B group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration in which an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit are provided as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to preferably perform a process for advancing the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A setting means (a function of executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, and
Situation setting means (function to execute the process of step S1803 in the main MPU 72) to be set in the advantageous transition possible situation (second section SC2), and
Processing of advantageous transition means (steps S2013 to S2105 and steps S2113 to S2116 in the main MPU 72) to shift the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5) advantageous to the player when the advantageous transition is possible. Function to execute) and
The first advantageous termination means (main side MPU 72) that terminates the advantageous gaming state based on the occurrence of a state termination trigger (both the AT continuation counter and the set count counter of the main RAM 74 are "0") in the advantageous gaming state. (Function to execute the processes of steps S2319 to S2321) in
With the first situation ending means (the function of executing the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72) to end the advantageous transition possible situation based on the occurrence of the situation end trigger (establishment of the ending condition) in the advantageous transition possible situation. ,
When the advantageous transition possible situation is terminated by the first situation ending means, the second advantageous ending means (processing of step S1914 in the main MPU 72) for ending the advantageous gaming state even if the state ending trigger has not occurred. Function to execute) and
When the advantageous gaming state is terminated by the first advantageous ending means, the second situation ending means (step S1902-step in the main MPU 72) for ending the advantageous transition possible situation even if the situation ending trigger has not occurred. (Functions for executing the processes of S1904, step S1914, step S2319, and step S2320) and
A special effect executing means for executing a special effect (character images G21 to G23) based on the fact that the game is executed without making a new setting for the advantageous transition possible state after the advantageous game state is completed. (A function of executing the processing of steps S3103 and S3104 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the processing of step S3202 in the effecting MPU 92).
With
The special effect executing means is a function of executing the process of step S3103 in the main MPU 72 for setting value corresponding means for determining the effect content of the special effect in a determination mode according to the set value set as the target of use. ) Is provided.

According to the feature C1, since the transition to the advantageous gaming state may occur when the advantageous transition is possible, the player who expects the transition to the advantageous gaming state is expected to be in the advantageous transition possible situation. Become. In addition, the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the situation end opportunity, and when the advantageous transition possible situation ends, the advantageous gaming state ends even if the state end opportunity does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from continuing excessively. In addition, when the state end trigger occurs and the advantageous gaming state ends, the advantageous transition possible situation can end even if the situation end trigger does not occur, so that the advantageous transition is possible with the end of the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to allow the situation to end.

In this case, if the special effect is executed based on the fact that the game is executed without making a new setting to the advantageous transition possible situation after the advantageous game state ends, the effect content of the special effect is It is determined in a determination mode according to the set value set as the target of use. That is, when the game is executed in a situation where the advantageous transition is not possible after the end of the advantageous gaming state, the setting suggestion is given to it. As a result, it is possible to make the execution of the game in a situation where the advantageous transition is not possible a profitable event for the player, not as a disadvantage.

Feature C2. The set value corresponding means uses the effect content of the special effect as the number of games executed after the advantageous gaming state ends without a new transition to the advantageous transition possible situation increases. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the set value set as is determined in a determination mode that makes it easy for the player to predict.

According to the feature C2, the setting suggestion in the special effect predicts the set value for the player so that the game is repeatedly executed without making a new setting to the advantageous transition possible state after the advantageous game state ends. It will be easy. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the game is repeatedly executed in a situation where the advantageous transition is not possible.

Feature C3. The feature C1 or C2 is characterized in that the situation setting means is set to the advantageous shiftable situation based on winning any of the winning combinations in the winning combination lottery process (processing of step S307 of the main MPU 72). The gaming machine described in.

According to feature C3, in a situation where it is not possible to make an advantageous transition, the situation is set to be advantageous based on winning one of the roles in the lottery process of the combination. It can be associated with the result of the lottery process. In addition, in the situation where the advantageous transition is not possible in the configuration, if the game in which no combination is won is repeated in the combination lottery process, the situation will continue, but the advantageous gaming state. In the situation after the end of the above, since the special effect including the content of the setting suggestion is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged even if the situation continues.

Feature C4. When the advantageous shiftable situation is set, the determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S1804 to S1807 in the main MPU 72) for determining the advantage (number of released games, transition mode) of the advantageous shiftable situation ,
A transition-compatible effect execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3204 to S3208 in the effect side MPU 92) that enables the transition-compatible effect (transition effect) to be executed when the advantageous transition-possible situation is set.
With
The transition-corresponding effect execution means executes the processes of steps S3204 to S3207 in the effect-side MPU 92 in a determination mode corresponding to the advantage determined by the determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the feature C4, the advantage of the advantageous shiftable situation is determined when the advantageous shiftable situation is set, so that the player pays attention to the determined advantage. In this case, the effect content of the shift-corresponding effect executed when the advantageous shiftable situation is set is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the advantage of the advantageous shiftable situation. As a result, it is possible to suggest the advantage of the advantageous shiftable situation by using the shift corresponding effect for making the player recognize that the advantageous shiftable situation is newly set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the transitional effect.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C4, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E5, the features F1 to F4, the features G1 to G5, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H6 and features I1 to I4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature C group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration in which an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit are provided as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operating means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of a pattern in the pattern display means, and
A game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72), which sets the game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the game is executed.
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A symbol display that controls the symbol display means so that the variable display of the symbol is started when the game is executed and the variable display of the symbol is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72) and
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Winning correspondence control means (a function of executing the processing of step S314 and step S315 in the main MPU 72) for executing correspondence control, and
When a specific combination (index value IV = 1 to 10) is won in the combination lottery process, a specific notification (push) that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in the specific stop operation mode. Specific notification control means (function of executing the processing of step S2802, step S2803, step S2805, step S2806, step S2809 and step S2810 in the main MPU 72) and
A predetermined effect execution means (a function of executing the process of step S2618 in the effect side MPU 92) for executing a predetermined effect (additional corresponding voice) when a predetermined execution trigger (process of step S2503) occurs, and
When the predetermined effect is executed in the situation where the specific notification is executed, the stop restriction in which the variation display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means is not stopped before the predetermined effect is executed. A stop restriction generating means (a function of executing the processes of steps S312, S720, and S2505 to S2514 in the main MPU 72) for generating a situation (freeze period), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D1, the player is notified of the specific notification by executing the specific notification that makes the player recognizable that the stop operation means should be operated in the specific stop operation mode when the specific combination is won. By operating the stop operation means according to the content, it is possible to establish a prize corresponding to a specific combination. In this case, when the predetermined effect is executed in the situation where the specific notification is executed, the stop restriction situation in which the variation display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means is not stopped before the predetermined effect is executed. Occurs. As a result, even if the stop operation means is operated in a stop operation mode different from the specific stop operation mode according to the content of the specific notification due to paying attention to the predetermined effect, the corresponding stop control is executed. It is possible to prevent it. Therefore, it is possible to make the game suitable.

Feature D2. The feature of the stop restriction generating means is that when the stop restriction situation is generated before the predetermined effect is executed, the stop restriction situation is released at a timing after the timing at which the predetermined effect ends. The gaming machine described in D1.

According to the feature D2, if the stop restriction situation occurs before the predetermined effect is executed, the stop restriction situation is released at a timing after the timing at which the predetermined effect ends. As a result, it is possible to invalidate the operation of the stop operation means in the situation where the predetermined effect is being executed.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the stop restriction generating means does not generate the stop restriction situation when the predetermined effect is executed in a situation where the specific notification is not executed.

According to the feature D3, when the predetermined effect is executed in the situation where the specific notification is not executed, the stop restriction situation does not occur, so that the operation of the stop operation means is invalidated excessively. It is possible to prevent it.

Feature D4. When the specific combination is won in the lottery process of the combination and the stop operation means is operated in the specific stop operation mode, the specific prize (first bell prize, second bell prize) is established. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein a profit (granting of a gaming medium) is given.

According to the feature D4, the specific notification is executed in the configuration in which the specific prize is established and the specific profit is given when the stop operation means is operated in the specific stop operation mode when the specific combination is won. When the predetermined effect is executed in, a stop restriction situation occurs in which the variation display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means is not stopped before the predetermined effect is executed. As a result, even if the stop operation means is operated in a stop operation mode different from the specific stop operation mode according to the content of the specific notification due to paying attention to the predetermined effect, the corresponding stop control is executed. Since it is possible to prevent the situation from occurring, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a specific profit will not be given even though the specific notification is executed when the specific role is won. ..

Feature D5. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variable display of the pattern.
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the plurality of the variable display areas.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the specific stop operation mode is such that the stop order of the variable display of the pattern in the plurality of variable display areas is the specific stop order.

According to the feature D5, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned excellent effect in the configuration in which the specific stop operation mode is such that the stop order of the variable display of the pattern is the specific stop order.

Feature D6. The timing at which the predetermined effect is executed includes a predetermined timing, which is the timing after the variation display of the pattern in the variation display area in which the stop order is in the predetermined order among the plurality of variation display areas is stopped. ,
When the predetermined effect is executed at the predetermined timing, the stop restriction generating means is said to be after the variation display of the pattern in the variation display area in the predetermined order is stopped and before the predetermined timing. The gaming machine according to feature D5, which is characterized by generating a stop restriction situation.

According to the feature D6, since the stop restriction situation is started immediately before the predetermined effect is generated, it is possible to prevent an excessive situation in which the operation of the stop operation means is invalidated.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D6, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E5, the features F1 to F4, the features G1 to G5, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H6 and features I1 to I4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A period measuring means (effect control counter of the effect side RAM 94) used for measuring a predetermined selection period (remaining switching period), and
The predetermined content to be selected from a plurality of types of predetermined content (effect mode) is set, and each time the measurement of the predetermined selection period measured by the period measuring means is completed, the selection target is set according to a predetermined order. Selection target setting means for switching the predetermined contents (a function of executing the processes of steps S2418 to S2421 in the effect side MPU 92) and
Predetermined content determining means (step S2416 in the effect side MPU 92) in which the predetermined content selected by the selection target setting means is set as the determination target content at the timing when the predetermined operation means (start lever 41) is operated by the player. Function to execute the processing of) and
A period for extending the period required for the period measuring means to complete the measurement of the predetermined selection period measured at that time based on the operation of the specific operating means (credit insertion button 47) by the player. Extension means (function to execute the process of step S2413 in the effect side MPU 92) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, each time the measurement of the predetermined selection period is completed, the predetermined contents to be selected are switched according to the predetermined order, and the predetermined contents to be selected at the timing when the predetermined operation means is operated by the player It will be the content to be decided. As a result, the player can operate the predetermined operating means at the timing when the desired predetermined content is the selection target, so that the desired predetermined content becomes the determination target content. In this case, based on the operation of the specific operating means by the player, the period required for the period measuring means to complete the measurement of the predetermined selection period measured at that time is extended. As a result, the player mistakenly operates the specific operation means in order to set the predetermined content that is the current selection target as the determination target content, and when he / she notices it and operates the predetermined operation means in a hurry. However, there is a high possibility that the predetermined content of the selection target at that time is the predetermined content that was the selection target at the timing when the specific operation means is operated. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform the player's selection operation.

Feature E2. The period extension means has the predetermined selection period in the period measurement means even if the measurement of the predetermined selection period in the period measurement means is in progress based on the operation of the specific operation means by the player. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that is newly measured.

According to the feature E2, when the specific operating means is operated, the period measuring means newly starts the measurement of the predetermined selection period, so that the period different from the predetermined selection period is extended in order to extend the predetermined selection period. There is no need to prepare the information in advance.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein both the predetermined operating means and the specific operating means are operating means operated to start a game.

According to the feature E3, since both the predetermined operation means and the specific operation means are the operation means operated to start the game, the specific operation is not the predetermined operation means as the operation means for selecting the desired predetermined content. There is a possibility that the means will be operated, but by providing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature E1, even if such an event occurs, it is possible to appropriately deal with it.

Feature E4. The specific operating means is an operating means operated to bet the game value.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the predetermined operating means is an operating means operated to start a game in a situation where the game value is bet.

According to the feature E4, the specific operating means is an operating means operated to bet the game value, and the predetermined operating means is an operating means operated to start the game in the situation where the game value is bet. Therefore, there is a possibility that the specific operating means is operated instead of the predetermined operating means as the operating means for selecting the desired predetermined content, and the predetermined operating means may be operated immediately after that. By providing the configuration, even if such an event occurs, it is possible to appropriately deal with it.

Feature E5. The process of step S2407 in the effect side MPU 92 for displaying the period (switching period image G3) that makes the player recognizable the period required for the period measurement means to complete the measurement of the predetermined selection period. Has a function to execute)
When the period required for the measurement of the predetermined selection period to be completed is extended by the period extension means, the period display means changes the display content of the period display according to the extension (in the production side MPU 92). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S2414).

According to the feature E5, the period display makes it easier for the player to predict the timing at which the predetermined content of the selection target is changed. In this case, if the predetermined selection period is extended, the display content of the period display is changed according to the extension, so that the player can clearly recognize that the predetermined selection period has been extended. Become.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E5, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E5, the features F1 to F4, the features G1 to G5, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H6 and features I1 to I4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. A picture display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variable display of a picture, and
A start operating means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of a pattern in the plurality of variable display areas, and
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the plurality of the variable display areas and operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the corresponding variable display areas.
The variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display areas is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variation display of the pattern in the corresponding variation display area is based on the operation of the stop operation means. A symbol display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the symbol display means so that
With
The pattern display control means
Acceleration control means for accelerating the variation display of the pattern in these variation display areas when the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display areas is started (in the first embodiment, the process of step S814 in the main MPU 72 is executed. In the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3406 in the main MPU 72, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3506 in the main MPU 72).
When it is specified that the variation display position of the pattern in the predetermined variation display area where the acceleration by the acceleration control means is completed is the predetermined reference position (the position where the reel index sensor 36 is turned on), the other variation is specified. Even if it is not specified that the variation display of the pattern in the display area has reached the predetermined reference position, it is possible to execute the stop control by operating the stop operation means for the variation display of the pattern in the predetermined variation display area. Stoppable setting means (a function of executing the process of step S819 in the MPU 72 in the first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3411 in the MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S3512 in the MPU 72 in the third embodiment. Function to execute processing) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature F1, the operation of the stop operation means is enabled when the variation display position of the pattern becomes the predetermined reference position after the acceleration is completed, so that the situation after the acceleration is completed It is possible to enable the operation of the stop operation means in a situation where the variable display position of the pattern can be grasped based on the predetermined reference position. In this case, when it is specified that the variable display position of the pattern in the predetermined variable display area where the acceleration is completed has become the predetermined reference position, the variable display of the pattern in the other variable display area has become the predetermined reference position. Even if this is not specified, it is possible to execute stop control by operating the stop operation means for the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined variable display area. As a result, in a configuration in which the operation of the stop operation means is enabled in a situation where the variable display position of the pattern can be grasped based on the predetermined reference position in the situation after the acceleration is completed as described above, the operation of the stop operation means is performed. Can be activated at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to make the game suitable.

Feature F2. The stoptable setting means has specified that the variation display position of the pattern in the predetermined variation display area has become the predetermined reference position in the situation where the acceleration by the acceleration control means for all of the plurality of variation display areas is completed. In this case, even if it is not specified that the variable display of the pattern in the other variable display area has reached the predetermined reference position, the stop operation means for the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined variable display area is stopped. The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that control can be executed.

According to the feature F2, even if it is specified that the acceleration with respect to the predetermined variable display area is completed and the variable display position of the pattern in the predetermined variable display area becomes the predetermined reference position, the plurality of variable display areas may be displayed. In the situation where the acceleration for all is not completed, the operation of the stop operation means corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation display area is not enabled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the stop control of the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined variable display area from being started even though the acceleration of the variable display of the pattern in a part of the variable display area has not been completed. It will be possible.

Feature F3. After the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display areas is started, when it is possible to execute the stop control by the operation of the stop operation means for all of the plurality of variation display areas, a plurality of cases. A means for setting the state of the light emitting means provided in each of the stop operation means to a state corresponding to the stop operation (in the second embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S3412 and S3413 in the main MPU 72) is provided. The gaming machine according to the feature F1 or F2.

According to the feature F3, in the configuration in which the operation of the stop operation means is individually enabled for each of the plurality of variable display areas, the operation of the stop operation means is enabled for all the variable display areas. When it is broken, the state of the light emitting means provided for each of the stop operation means becomes a state corresponding to the stop operation. As a result, it is possible to align the timing at which the state of the light emitting means of the stop operation means becomes the state corresponding to the stop operation, and the player is informed that the stop operation order is notified by switching the state of the light emitting means. It is possible not to misunderstand.

Feature F4. A combination lottery means (a function of executing a combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the game is started based on the start operation means being operated, and
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Winning correspondence control means (a function of executing the processing of step S314 and step S315 in the main MPU 72) for executing correspondence control, and
With
When the stop operation means corresponding to the case where the change display position of the pattern in the predetermined change display area is in the first range is operated, the operation timing of the stop operation means is won in the lottery process of the combination. It is the operation timing that enables the display of the stop result corresponding to the predetermined combination (index value IV = 13), and corresponds to the case where the variation display position of the pattern in the predetermined variation display area is the second range. When the stop operation means is operated, the operation timing of the stop operation means is such that the display of the stop result corresponding to the predetermined combination won in the lottery process of the combination is disabled. can be,
The situation after the stop operation means corresponding to the case where the variable display position of the pattern in the predetermined variable display area is in the first range is the situation in which the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined variable display area is displayed. Rather than the situation after the stop operation means corresponding to the case where the position is in the second range is operated, the variation display of the pattern in the predetermined variation display area is started and then the predetermined variation display area is relative to the predetermined variation display area. Features F1 to feature F1 to be characterized in that the period required for the acceleration by the acceleration control means to be completed and the variation display position of the pattern in the predetermined variation display region to be specified as the predetermined reference position is shortened. The gaming machine according to any one of F3.

According to the feature F4, when the stop operation means corresponding to the case where the change display position of the pattern in the predetermined change display area is in the first range is operated, the stop result corresponding to the predetermined combination can be displayed. In the configuration, the situation after the stop operation means corresponding to the case where the variation display position of the pattern in the predetermined variation display area is the first range is operated is the situation where the variation display position of the pattern in the predetermined variation display area is set. Compared to the situation after the stop operation means corresponding to the case where is in the second range is operated, the acceleration for the predetermined variable display area is completed after the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined variable display area is started. The period required for the variable display position of the pattern in the predetermined variable display area to be specified as the predetermined reference position is shortened. As a result, the stop operation means is operated when the variation display position of the pattern in the predetermined variation display area is the first range in which the variation display position of the pattern enables the display of the stop result corresponding to the predetermined combination. In the above, it is possible to shorten the period required for the operation of the stop operation means for the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined variable display area to be effective.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F4, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E5, the features F1 to F4, the features G1 to G5, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H6 and features I1 to I4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to each feature of the feature D group, the feature E group, and the feature F group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration in which an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit are provided as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, it is necessary to make the game suitable for the gaming machine as in the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern, and
The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Pattern display control means (function to execute reel control processing on the main MPU 72) and
Predetermined response processing (processing of steps S314 and S315 of the main MPU 72) corresponding to the result of the game in which the variation display of the pattern is performed after the variation display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means. A control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S314 and S315 in the main MPU 72) and
After the variation display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means and before the predetermined correspondence process is executed, the predetermined period measurement means (OFF continuation counter of the main RAM 74) is used for a predetermined period (OFF continuation). Measurement start means (function to execute the process of step S2318 in the main MPU 72) and
After the predetermined response process is executed and when the measurement for the predetermined period using the predetermined period measurement means is completed, the post-measurement process (process in step S3307 of the main MPU 72) is executed. Processing execution means (function to execute the processing of step S3307 in the main MPU 72) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G1, the measurement for a predetermined period is started after the variable display of the pattern and before the predetermined correspondence process is executed, and the measurement for the predetermined period is completed after the predetermined correspondence process is executed. In some cases, post-measurement processing is executed. As a result, when the post-measurement processing is executed after the predetermined period has elapsed after the variable display of the pattern, it is possible to measure the predetermined period including the execution period of the predetermined corresponding processing. Therefore, the process can be preferably executed.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the post-measurement processing is a process of switching a state of a predetermined external signal (AT signal) from a first state (LOW level) to a second state (HI level).

According to the feature G2, when the state of the predetermined external signal is switched from the first state to the second state after the predetermined period elapses after the variable display of the pattern, the predetermined period including the execution period of the predetermined correspondence process is measured. It becomes possible.

Feature G3. Based on the fact that the switching condition is satisfied, the state of the predetermined external signal is set to the second state after the variation display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means and before the predetermined correspondence process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature G2, which comprises means for switching from the state to the first state (a function of executing the process of step S2317 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature G3, when the switching condition is satisfied, the state of the predetermined external signal is switched from the second state to the first state after the variation display of the pattern, and when the predetermined period elapses thereafter, the predetermined external signal By switching the state of from the first state to the second state, it becomes possible for the device outside the gaming machine to know that the switching condition has been satisfied. In this case, the configuration of the above-mentioned feature G1 is provided, and the state of the predetermined external signal is switched from the second state to the first state after the variation display of the pattern and before the predetermined correspondence process is executed, and the measurement for a predetermined period is performed. Is started, and when the measurement for a predetermined period is completed after the predetermined correspondence process is executed, the state of the predetermined external signal is switched from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to measure a predetermined period including the execution period of the predetermined response process.

Feature G4. Any of the features G1 to G3, wherein the predetermined correspondence process includes a process of driving and controlling the payout means (hopper device 53) so that the gaming medium is paid out (process of step S315 of the main MPU 72). The gaming machine described in 1 or 1.

According to the feature G4, it is possible to measure a predetermined period including a period in which the payout means is driven and controlled so that the game medium is paid out.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the execution period of the predetermined response process can be longer than the predetermined period.

According to the feature G5, there is a situation in which the measurement for a predetermined period is completed in the situation where the predetermined response process is being executed. In this case, it is possible to execute the processing after the measurement is completed without causing a period of waiting for processing.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G5, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E5, the features F1 to F4, the features G1 to G5, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H6 and features I1 to I4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention of the feature G group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration in which an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit are provided as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, it is necessary to ensure that the processing is preferably executed in a gaming machine such as the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. A number storage means (credit counter 74b) for storing information on the number of game values that can be used by the player, and
A betting operation means (credit insertion button 47) operated to bet information on the number of game values stored in the number storage means, and
A game control means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that starts a game when a start operation means (start lever 41) is operated in a situation where a predetermined number of the game values are bet. ,
Re-game granting means (mainly) that grants a predetermined re-game privilege that enables a new start of the game without requiring a bet of game value when a predetermined re-game prize (special replay prize) is established in the game. (Function to execute the process of step S1407 in the side MPU 72) and
A first display means (main side bet display unit 64) that displays information on the number of game values bet, and
A second display means (directing side bet display unit 69) that displays information on the number of game values bet, and
When the predetermined re-game prize is established, the display of the information on the number of the game values bet in the first display means is the same as when the re-game prize different from the predetermined re-game prize is established. The first display control means (a function of executing the control process of the bet display unit on the main MPU 72) and the display contents.
When the predetermined re-game winning is established, the display of the information on the number of bets on the game value in the second display means is terminated, and when a re-display opportunity occurs thereafter, the second display means A second display control means (a function of executing the processes of step S1705, step S1707, and step S1711 in the effect side MPU 92) for resuming the display of the information on the number of game values bet.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature H1, the number of bet game values is notified by providing the first display means and the second display means as the display means for displaying the information on the number of bet game values. It is possible to diversify the aspects. In this case, when the predetermined re-game prize is established, the display of the information on the number of bet game values in the first display means is the same as when the re-game prize different from the predetermined re-game prize is established. In contrast to the display content of, in the second display means, after the display of the information on the number of bet game values is once completed, a redisplay opportunity occurs, so that the bet game is bet. The display of the number of values information is resumed. This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the re-game prize has not been established even if the predetermined re-game prize has actually been established by paying attention to the second display means. By confirming the first display means, the administrator of the above can visually confirm whether or not a predetermined re-game winning prize has been established. Therefore, it is possible to make the game suitable.

Feature H2. The main control means (main side MPU72) that controls the progress of the game,
The effect control means (effect side MPU92) that controls the execution of the effect based on the information transmitted from the main control means, and
With
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the main control means has the first display control means, and the effect control means has the second display control means.

According to the feature H2, in the first display means controlled by the main control means, the display of the information on the number of game values bet when the predetermined re-game winning is established is different from the predetermined re-game winning. While the display content is the same as when the re-game prize is established, in the second display means controlled by the effect control means, the game value bet is bet when the predetermined re-game prize is established. After the display of the number of information is once finished, it is restarted based on the occurrence of the redisplay opportunity. As a result, it is possible to enhance the reliability of the display for the first display means controlled by the main control means, and to enhance the effect of the display for the second display means controlled by the effect control means.

Feature H3. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the display range of the second display means is set wider than the display range of the first display means.

According to the feature H3, when a predetermined re-game winning prize is established, the re-display opportunity occurs after the display of the information on the number of game values bet in the second display means having a relatively wide display range is once completed. In the first display means, which has a relatively narrow display range, the display of the number of bet game values is different from the predetermined re-game prize, while the re-game prize is restarted based on the occurrence. The display content will be the same as when This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the re-game prize has not been established even if the predetermined re-game prize has actually been established by paying attention to the second display means. By confirming the first display means, the administrator of the above can visually confirm whether or not a predetermined re-game winning prize has been established.

Feature H4. When the second display control means ends the display of the information on the number of bets on the game value in the second display means due to the establishment of the predetermined re-game winning, the re-display trigger thereafter. The game according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein when the betting operation means is operated, the display of information on the number of bets on the game value in the second display means is restarted. Machine.

According to the feature H4, when the display of the information on the number of game values bet on the second display means is once completed due to the establishment of the predetermined re-game winning, and then the bet operation means is operated. The display of the information on the number of game values bet is resumed. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that a new bet has been made by the operation of the betting operation means even after the predetermined re-game winning is established.

Feature H5. When the second display control means ends the display of the information on the number of game values bet on the second display means due to the establishment of the predetermined re-game winning, the bet operation means thereafter. The game according to feature H4, wherein the display of the information on the number of bets on the game value in the second display means is restarted even when the start operation means is operated without the operation. Machine.

According to the feature H5, when the display of the information on the number of bet game values in the second display means is once completed due to the establishment of the predetermined re-game winning, the bet operation means is not operated thereafter. However, when the start operation means is operated, the display of the information on the number of game values bet is resumed. When the predetermined re-game winning is established, the state in which the game value is actually bet is maintained, so that the game is started when the start operation means is operated. In this case, if the start operation means is operated even if the bet operation means is not operated as described above, the display of the information on the number of bet game values in the second display means is resumed. In the situation where the game is started, it is possible to display the information on the number of game values in the second display means.

Feature H6. When a plurality of game values are bet based on the operation of the bet operation means, the second display control means displays the display corresponding to the bet of the plurality of game values. 2 It is provided with a step change means (a function of executing the processes of step S1702 and step S1707 in the effect side MPU 92) for stepwise changing the display of the display means.
The stage change means is a case where the multiple bet display corresponding to the bet of the plurality of game values in the second display means is terminated due to the establishment of the predetermined re-game winning, and then the step change means is described. When the bet operation means is operated, the display of the second display means is changed stepwise to restart the plurality of bet display in the second display means.
The second display control means is a case where a plurality of bet displays corresponding to a plurality of game values bet in the second display means are terminated due to the establishment of the predetermined re-game winning prize, and thereafter. When the start operation means is operated without the bet operation means being operated, the means for restarting the plurality of bet display as it is in the second display means (function of executing the process of step S1711 in the effect side MPU 92). The gaming machine according to the feature H5, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature H6, the predetermined re-game winning is established in the configuration in which the display of the second display means is changed stepwise so that the multiple bet display is performed when a plurality of game values are bet. When the multiple bet display in the second display means is once terminated and the bet operation means is operated after that, the display of the second display means is changed stepwise so that the multiple bet display is performed. .. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that a new bet has been made by the operation of the betting operation means even after the predetermined re-game winning is established. On the other hand, when the multiple bet display in the second display means is once terminated due to the establishment of the predetermined re-game winning, and the start operation means is operated without the bet operation means being operated thereafter. In the second display means, the display of the plurality of bets is resumed as it is. As a result, in the situation where the game is started, it is possible to enable the second display means to display the plurality of bets at an early stage.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features H1 to H6, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E5, the features F1 to F4, the features G1 to G5, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H6 and features I1 to I4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention of the above-mentioned feature H group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration in which an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit are provided as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, it is necessary to make the game suitable for the gaming machine as in the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operating means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of a pattern in the pattern display means, and
A game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72), which sets the game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the game is executed.
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A symbol display that controls the symbol display means so that the variable display of the symbol is started when the game is executed and the variable display of the symbol is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72) and
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Winning correspondence control means (a function of executing the processing of step S314 and step S315 in the main MPU 72) for executing correspondence control, and
With
If the corresponding special prize (BB prize or RB prize) is not established in the winning game as a winning role in the lottery process of the winning role, the winning state is maintained in the next game. A special role (a role in which BB winning data is set, a role in which RB winning data is set) is set, and
The combination lottery means is configured so that the special combination can be won in the lottery process of the combination even if the special combination has been won.
When the special combination is won in the lottery process of the combination while the special combination has been won, the gaming machine invalidates the new winning of the special combination (step in the main MPU 72). A gaming machine characterized by having a function of making an affirmative judgment in S602).

According to the feature I1, when a special role is won in the role lottery process, even if the corresponding special prize is not established in the winning game, the state in which the special role is won is also in the next game. Be maintained. In this case, even if the special role is won, the special role can be won in the role lottery process, and the special role is won in the role lottery process while the special role is won. In that case, the winning of the new special role will be treated as invalid. As a result, the execution mode of the lottery process of the combination is made common between the state where the special role is not won and the state where the special role is won, while preventing the state where a plurality of special roles are won at the same time. It becomes possible. Therefore, the process can be preferably executed.

Feature I2. The role lottery means
An acquisition means for acquiring lottery numerical information (a function of executing the process of step S501 in the main MPU 72) and
Winning correspondence information group (non-bonus combination lottery table) that makes it possible to identify which combination the lottery numerical information acquired by the acquisition means has won, and the lottery numerical information acquired by the acquisition means. A lottery execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S502 to S508 in the main MPU 72) for executing the lottery process of the winning combination, and
Is equipped with
The feature I1 is characterized in that the lottery executing means uses a common winning correspondence information group regardless of whether the special combination has not been won or the special combination has been won. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature I2, the common winning correspondence information group is used regardless of whether the special role is not won or the special role is won. As a result, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the winning corresponding information group in advance.

Feature I3. The special role includes a first special role (a role in which BB winning data is set) and a second special role (a combination in which RB winning data is set).
The invalid means has won the other of the first special combination and the second special combination in the lottery process of the combination in a state where one of the first special combination and the second special combination has been elected. If the gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, the new winning of the special role is invalidated.

According to the feature I3, in a configuration in which the execution content of the lottery process of the combination is not changed depending on whether or not the special combination is elected, one of the first special combination and the second special combination is elected to the other. Even if the winner is elected, the newly elected side is invalidated, so that it is possible to prevent the first special role and the second special role from being elected at the same time.

Feature I4. When the special role is won, the winning state can be won even for a specific role (a role in which cherry winning data is set) that is not carried over to the next game.
When the special combination and the specific combination are won in the lottery process of the combination in the state where the special combination has been won, the invalidation means invalidates the new winning of the special combination. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, which does not invalidate the winning of the specific combination.

According to the feature I4, in the combination lottery process, a special combination in which the winning state can be carried over to the next game and a specific combination in which the winning state is not carried over to the next game can be won at the same time. In this case, if both the special role and the specific role are won in the role lottery process while the special role has been won, the new special role will be invalidated, while the specific role will not be won. Not invalidated. As a result, in a configuration in which the execution content of the lottery process for a role is not changed depending on whether or not a special role has been won, the profit of winning a specific role can be obtained while preventing a state in which a plurality of special roles are won at the same time. It is possible to prevent it from disappearing.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of features I1 to I4, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E5, features F1 to F4, features G1 to G5, and features H1 to 1 One or a plurality of configurations of H6 and features I1 to I4 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention of the feature I group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration in which an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit are provided as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, it is necessary to ensure that the processing is preferably executed in a gaming machine such as the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: The rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and the player according to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that gives special benefits to pachinko machines.

10 ... Slot machine, 31 ... Reel unit, 32L, 32M, 32R ... Reel, 36 ... Reel index sensor, 41 ... Start lever, 42-44 ... Stop button, 47 ... Credit insertion button, 53 ... Hopper device, 63 ... Image Display device, 64 ... Main side bet display unit, 69 ... Production side bet display unit, 72 ... Main side MPU, 74 ... Main side RAM, 74b ... Credit counter, 74c ... Continuous game number counter, 74d ... Total acquisition number counter, 92 ... Directing side MPU, G3 ... Switching period image.

Claims (4)

A pattern display means having a plurality of variable display areas for variable display of a pattern,
A start operation means operated to start a variable display of a pattern in the plurality of variable display areas, and a start operation means.
A plurality of stop operation means provided corresponding to the plurality of the variable display areas and operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the corresponding variable display areas.
The variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display areas is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variation display of the pattern in the corresponding variation display area is started based on the operation of the stop operation means. And the pattern display control means that controls the pattern display means so that
With
The pattern display control means
Acceleration control means for accelerating the variation display of the pattern in these variation display areas when the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display areas is started.
When it is specified that the variation display position of the pattern in the predetermined variation display area where the acceleration by the acceleration control means is completed has become the predetermined reference position, the variation display of the pattern in the other variation display area is the predetermined reference position. A stop enablement setting means that enables execution of stop control by the operation of the stop operation means for the change display of the pattern in the predetermined change display area, even if it is not specified that the result is
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with. The stoptable setting means has specified that the variation display position of the pattern in the predetermined variation display area has become the predetermined reference position in the situation where the acceleration by the acceleration control means for all of the plurality of variation display areas is completed. In this case, even if it is not specified that the variable display of the pattern in the other variable display area has reached the predetermined reference position, the stop operation means for the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined variable display area is stopped. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the control can be executed. After the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display areas is started, when it is possible to execute the stop control by the operation of the stop operation means for all of the plurality of variation display areas, a plurality of cases. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising means for setting the state of the light emitting means provided in each of the stop operation means to a state corresponding to the stop operation. A combination lottery means for executing a combination lottery process when the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and a combination lottery means.
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Winning response control means to enable response control and
With
When the stop operation means corresponding to the case where the change display position of the pattern in the predetermined change display area is in the first range is operated, the operation timing of the stop operation means is won in the lottery process of the combination. It is the operation timing that enables the display of the stop result corresponding to the predetermined combination, and the stop operation means corresponding to the case where the variation display position of the pattern in the predetermined variation display area is in the second range is operated. In this case, the operation timing of the stop operation means is the operation timing that makes it impossible to display the stop result corresponding to the predetermined combination that was won in the lottery process of the combination.
The situation after the stop operation means corresponding to the case where the variable display position of the pattern in the predetermined variable display area is in the first range is the situation in which the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined variable display area is displayed. Rather than the situation after the stop operation means corresponding to the case where the position is in the second range is operated, the variation display of the pattern in the predetermined variation display area is started and then the predetermined variation display area is provided. Claim 1 is characterized in that the period required for the acceleration by the acceleration control means to be completed and the variation display position of the pattern in the predetermined variation display region to be specified as the predetermined reference position is shortened. The gaming machine according to any one of 3 to 3.

Images